JP5456362B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention provides the first identification information based on the establishment of the first start condition that permits the start of the variable display after the first execution condition of the variable display based on the passage of the game medium through the first start area is satisfied. The first variation display unit for displaying the variation display and displaying the display result and the second execution condition of the variation display based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second start area are allowed to start the variation display. And a second variation display unit that executes variation display of the second identification information and derives and displays the display result based on the establishment of the second start condition to be performed, and the variation is displayed on the first variation display unit or the second variation display unit. When the display result derived and displayed on the display unit becomes a predetermined specific display result, the gaming state is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, and a predetermined special state generation condition is established. Based on the low accuracy as the normal state Variable display of the display results than state relates to a gaming machine to control the high-probability state having an improved probability of the specific display results.

  What is generally known as this type of gaming machine is that, for example, a game medium (game ball) has passed through the first starting area (first starting prize opening) as in a pachinko gaming machine. After the first execution condition of the variable display based on is satisfied (when the variable display that has started the variable display is ended during the big hit game is not completed), the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display is satisfied Based on the first variation display unit for performing variation display of the first identification information (first symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result, and that the game medium has passed through the second start area (second start winning opening) After the second execution condition of the variable display based on is satisfied, the display of the second identification information (second symbol) is performed and the display result is derived based on the satisfaction of the second start condition allowing the start of the variable display A second variation display unit for displaying, and a first variation display unit. When the display result derived and displayed on the second variation display unit becomes a predetermined specific display result (big hit display result), the game state is changed to a specific gaming state (big hit) that is advantageous to the player. Gaming state), and the probability state that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is improved as compared with the low probability state as the normal state based on the establishment of a predetermined special state occurrence condition. There was something to control (probable change state).

  In addition, for such gaming machines, the number of start winning memories (the number of reserved memories) in the variable display of a plurality of special symbols after that, based on the result of lottery whether or not to be a big hit executed at the time of starting winning. ) Is an upper limit, and there is one that executes a continuous notice, which is a notice effect that is continuously executed (Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-236150 A (paragraph numbers 0170 to 0173)

  However, when performing the continuous notice effect as in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, since the variation display variation pattern is selected at a constant rate regardless of the number of reserved storages, the identification information variation display execution efficiency is improved. There was a risk that it would decrease and give the player a sense of fatigue and reduce the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the execution efficiency of display of variation in identification information and improving the interest of the game. .

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) The first start that permits the start of the variable display after the first execution condition of the variable display based on the passage of the game medium (game ball) through the first start region (the first start winning opening 13) is satisfied. Executes variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol) based on the fulfillment of the condition (when the variable display due to the hold storage that is not in the big hit game and started the variable display first). The first variation display unit (first special symbol display 8a) for deriving and displaying the display result and the second execution condition of the variation display based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second starting area are satisfied, and then the variation display is performed. Based on the establishment of the second start condition that permits the start of the second identification information (when the variable display due to the hold storage that has started the variable display is ended) Executes variable display of special symbols and derives display results A second variation display unit (second special symbol display device 9a) that performs a specific display result (a jackpot display result) in which a display result derived and displayed on the first variation display unit or the second variation display unit is predetermined. The game state is controlled to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player, and a predetermined special state occurrence condition is satisfied (it is determined to be a big hit with probability fluctuation) Game machine (Pachinko gaming machine 1) that controls to a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is higher than the low probability state as the normal state based on There,
A variable winning device capable of changing between a first state (open state) in which game media easily pass through the second starting area and a second state (closed state) in which game media are less likely to pass or do not pass through the first state. (Variable winning ball apparatus 15),
The game state can be changed between a first state (open state) in which the game medium can be won and a second state (closed state) in which the game medium is harder to win or not win than the first state, and is controlled to the specific game state. A special variable winning device (special variable winning ball device 20) controlled to the first state when
A high-frequency state (high base state) in which the variable winning device is frequently in the first state, or a low-frequency state (low in frequency) in which the variable winning device is in the first state is lower than the high-frequency state. State control means for controlling to any of the base state (game control microcomputer 560, S158 to S160 in FIG. 36, S139 to S142 in FIG. 32),
As the information for determining whether or not to control the specific gaming state when the first execution condition is satisfied, first numerical data (randomly updated) by first numerical data updating means (random number circuit 503) R) and the second numerical data (random 3) updated by the second numerical data updating means (game control microcomputer 560, S17 in FIG. 4) as information for determining the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display. ) For extracting first numerical data (game control microcomputer 560, S213 in FIG. 23);
Numerical information including the first numerical data and the second numerical data extracted by the first numerical data extraction means for the variable display in which the first execution condition is satisfied but the first start condition is not satisfied First hold storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, first hold storage buffer, S213 in FIG. 23) that can be stored as hold storage information within a predetermined upper limit range;
Extracting the first numerical data updated by the first numerical data updating means as information for determining whether or not to control to the specific gaming state when the second execution condition is satisfied; As information for determining the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display, second numerical data extraction means (game controlling microcomputer 560, FIG. 24) for extracting the second numerical data updated by the second numerical data update means. S223),
Numerical information including the first numerical data and the second numerical data extracted by the second numerical data extraction means for the variable display in which the second execution condition is satisfied but the second start condition is not satisfied Second reserved storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, second reserved storage buffer, S223 in FIG. 24) that can be stored as reserved storage information within a predetermined upper limit number range,
A plurality of determinations comprising a plurality of data tables provided according to the number of storages of the storage information stored in each of the first storage storage unit and the second storage storage unit, wherein determination values are assigned to a plurality of variation patterns. A value table (fluctuation pattern determination table of FIGS. 15 to 19);
Based on the establishment of the first start condition, the first numerical value extracted by the first numerical data extraction means when the first execution condition of the variable display in which the first start condition is satisfied is established. It is determined whether to control to the specific gaming state using data, whether to control to the high probability state, and based on the second start condition being met, the second start It is determined whether or not to control to the specific gaming state using the first numerical data extracted by the second numerical data extraction means when the second execution condition of the variable display in which the condition is satisfied is satisfied. In addition, a pre-determining means for determining whether or not to control to the high probability state (game control microcomputer 560, S59 in FIG. 28, S341-S347 in FIG. 26),
The second numerical value extracted by the first numerical data extraction means when the first execution condition of the variable display subject to determination by the prior determination means is satisfied in response to the determination by the prior determination means. The variation display of the variation display of the first identification information is selected using data and the determination value table, and the variation display that is the target of the determination by the prior determination unit according to the determination by the prior determination unit A variation pattern of the variation display of the second identification information using the second numerical data extracted by the second numerical data extraction means when the second execution condition is satisfied and the determination value table. A variation pattern selection means to be selected (game control microcomputer 560, S96 and S98 in FIG. 29);
Based on the second numerical data extracted by the first numerical data extraction means and the determination value when the first execution condition is satisfied, a specific fluctuation pattern (a plurality of fluctuation patterns ( Whether or not the super-reach B) is satisfied is determined before the first start condition of the variable display of the first identification information that satisfies the first execution condition is satisfied. Microcomputer 100, S240 and S241 in FIG.
Based on the determination by the determination means when the execution condition is satisfied, the change display subject to the determination is notified before the first start condition is satisfied over a plurality of variable displays before the first change condition is satisfied. prefetch prediction effect execution means for (pre-read announcement perform continuous announcement) (effect control microcomputer 100, S666 of FIG. 44, S518 of FIG. 46, S683 of FIG. 51, S684, S845, S846 of FIG. 59) and a,
The specific gaming state is
The special variable winning device is terminated by changing the special variable winning device to the first state for a predetermined period (29 seconds × 9R), and after the specific gaming state is finished, the first specific gaming state (probability big hit) controlled to the high probability state When,
The special variable winning device is ended by changing to the first state for a period (0.5 seconds × 9R) shorter than the predetermined period, and after the specific gaming state is finished, the second state is controlled to the high probability state. Including a specific gaming state (first hit probability hit, second hit probability hit),
The state control means is configured such that when the low-frequency state and the high-probability state are controlled, the second identification is performed at a higher rate than when the low-frequency state and the low-probability state are controlled. After the gaming state is finished, control is made to the high-frequency state (the first special symbol high probability jackpot type determination table in FIG. 7D is more than the first special symbol low probability jackpot type determination table in FIG. 7C). The ratio to be determined for the second maximum likelihood hit is high (see FIG. 8).
In the plurality of determination value tables, as the determination value, a common determination value is assigned to the specific variation pattern (super reach B) among the plurality of variation patterns regardless of the number of the stored storage information. (For example, in the determination tables of FIGS. 15 and 16, the same determination data of 105 to 109 of random 3 is assigned to Super Reach B regardless of the number of starting memories). Variations other than the specific variation pattern Different determination values are assigned to the patterns depending on the number of stored stored information (for example, in the determination tables of FIGS. 15 and 16, normal reach and super reach A usually have different random numbers depending on the start storage number. 3 judgment data is allocated)
Variation display of the first identification information (variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the winning to the first start winning opening 13) and variation display of the second identification information (second start in the variable winning ball apparatus 15) And control to the high-frequency state and the high-probability state at the end of the second specific gaming state. The ratio at which the display result to be displayed is derived and displayed is different.

According to such a configuration, the plurality of determination value tables including the data tables in which the determination values are assigned to the plurality of variation patterns are stored in the number of the stored storage information in each of the first reserved storage unit and the second reserved storage unit. A common determination value is assigned as a determination value regardless of the number of stored stored information for a specific variation pattern, and storage of reserved storage information is performed for variation patterns other than the specific variation pattern. Different judgment values are assigned depending on the number. Then, whether or not a specific variation pattern is obtained is determined before the first start condition of the variation display in which the first execution condition is satisfied, or the second start condition of the variation display in which the second execution condition is satisfied. based on the previously determined to be from the previous target variable display of the start condition establishment became of the determination, to be a specific change pattern is subject over the variable display of a plurality of times. As described above, since a common determination value is assigned to a specific variation pattern regardless of the number of stored stored information, it can be determined whether a specific variation pattern is obtained regardless of the number of stored stored information. . In addition, different variation values other than a specific variation pattern are assigned with different determination values depending on the number of reserved storage information, so it is possible to select a variation pattern at a different rate depending on the number of reserved storage information. Therefore, it is possible to improve the execution efficiency of the variation display of the identification information, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, when the low-frequency state and the high-probability state are controlled, the low-frequency state and the low-probability state are higher than when the low-frequency state and the low-probability state are controlled. As a result, the high-frequency state is controlled after the second specific gaming state is finished. Therefore, if the high-probability state is controlled, the low-frequency state can be made difficult to continue, and the player is less likely to feel fatigue. In this way, the interest of the game can be further improved. Further, the display of the first identification information and the display of the second identification information are controlled to the second specific gaming state, and at the end of the second specific gaming state, the high-frequency state and the high-probability state are set. Since the rate at which the display result to be controlled is derived and displayed is different, it is possible to characterize the control content after the end of the second specific gaming state for each identification information, and to further improve the interest of the game Can do.

  (2) Predetermined conditions (such as being controlled for small hits) including being controlled to the low-frequency state (controlled for first big hits) after the end of the second specific gaming state have been established The high probability state and the low probability state by executing a common effect (display of the first latent mode background image or the second latent mode background image in FIG. 14), thereby obtaining the high probability state. High-probability suggestion effect control means (production control microcomputer 100, S985 to S987 in FIG. 63) is further provided.

  According to such a configuration, a common effect is performed in the high-probability state and the low-probability state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition including control to the low-frequency state after the end of the second specific gaming state. By doing so, it is controlled to a high-probability suggesting production state that suggests the possibility of a high-probability state, so even when the low-frequency state is controlled, when the common production is being executed, the high-probability state By attracting the player's interest in whether or not the game is in a low probability state, the interest of the game can be further improved.

(3) It includes a plurality of identification information display areas for deriving and displaying the display results in a predetermined order (normal order or reverse order), and the plurality of identification information display areas (each symbol display area 9L, 9C, 9R), a third variable display unit (effect display device 9) for performing variable display of the third identification information (effect display symbol) associated with the variable display of at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information. Further comprising
The high-probability suggestion effect control means is when the display result of the third identification information is derived and displayed when being controlled to the high-probability suggestion effect state, and when the high-probability suggestion effect state is not controlled. By deriving and displaying the display results in a derived display order (reverse order) different from the derived display order (normal order) of the display results of the third identification information in the variable display, the possibility of the high probability state is suggested (FIG. 46 S500, FIG. 48 S704, S705).

  According to such a configuration, when the display result of the third identification information is derived and displayed while being controlled to the high probability suggesting effect state, the second display in the variable display when not being controlled to the high probability suggesting effect state. 3 Since the display result is derived and displayed in a derived display order different from the derived display order of the display result of the identification information, the possibility of a high probability state is suggested, so it is based on visually attracting the player's interest , The interest of the game can be further improved.

  (4) The high-probability suggestion effect control means is in the high-probability suggestion effect state when performing a step-up effect in which the effect mode is stepped up in a predetermined order when being controlled to the high probability suggestion effect state. Step-up effects are stepped up in a different order (A → C → B → D in FIG. 56 (c)) than the step-up effects (A → B → C → D in FIG. 56 (a)) performed when not controlled. This suggests the possibility of the high probability state.

  According to such a configuration, by stepping up the production mode in a different order from the step-up production performed when not controlled to the high probability suggestion production state when being controlled to the high probability suggestion production state, Since the possibility of a high probability state is suggested, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game based on the fact that the progress of the effect attracts the player.

(5) The second specific gaming state has a plurality of types of change modes when changing the special variable winning device to the first state (opening patterns A and B in FIG. 10).
The high-probability suggesting effect state has a plurality of types of the common effect (background image in the first latent mode, background image in the second latent mode in FIG. 14),
The ratio of the high probability state in the high probability suggestion state is obtained by combining the change mode of the special variable winning device in the second specific gaming state and the common effect type in the high probability suggestion state. 11 (in the data table of FIG. 11, the release pattern A is selected at a higher rate than the release pattern B when it becomes the first hit likelihood shift to the latent mode. In the data table of FIG. 62, The second latent pattern is selected at a higher rate than the first latent pattern when the first sudden hit is made to shift to the latent mode, so that, for example, the first prize opening is opened in the first opening pattern A. When the background image of the second latent mode is displayed with the opening pattern A being opened and the background image of the second latent mode is displayed, it is more probable than when the background image of the latent mode is displayed. Rate in Thailand is high.).

  According to such a configuration, the combination of the change mode of the special variable prize-winning device in the second specific gaming state and the common effect type in the high-probability suggesting effect state causes the high-probability state in the high-probability state. Because certain percentages are different, the player must infer whether the percentage of high-probability states is high based on the relationship between the operation of the special variable prize-winning device and the types of productions that are common in the high-probability suggested stage Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved based on the combination of effects.

  (6) When being controlled to the high probability suggesting effect state in the low probability state, and when it is determined to control to the specific gaming state by the prior determination means during the high probability suggesting effect state Special effect executing means (the effect control microcomputer 100, S878A in FIG. 60) that executes a special effect (effect that displays a special character) that is not executed when the high probability state is controlled to the high probability suggestion effect state. S878C).

  According to such a configuration, when the high probability suggestion state is controlled in the low probability state, when it is determined to control to the specific gaming state during the high probability suggestion state, the high probability state Since a special effect that is not executed when controlled to a high-probability suggestive effect state is executed, it is possible to improve the player's satisfaction with his game that caused such a situation. .

  (7) When the pre-determining means is controlled to the low-frequency state and the high-probability state, the pre-determining means is a second rate lower than that when the low-frequency state and the low-probability state are controlled. It is determined to be in a specific gaming state (as shown in FIG. 68, for the first special symbol, when the probability is high (high probability low base), the first probability is higher than when the probability is low (low probability low base). The ratio at which the big hit and the second sudden hit big hit are selected is set low).

  According to such a configuration, when the low-frequency state and the high-probability state are controlled, the second specific gaming state is set at a lower rate than when the low-frequency state and the low-probability state are controlled. Since the second specific gaming state in which the period during which the special variable winning device changes to the first state is shorter than the first specific gaming state is less likely to occur repeatedly, the player feels tired of the game. Can be prevented, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number used for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows various determination tables, such as a jackpot determination table and a jackpot classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the jackpot probability, the random 2, and the jackpot type selected about the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. It is a figure which shows each characteristic of various big hits and small hits in a table format. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus at the time of the 1st big hit, the 2nd big hit, and the small hit. It is a figure which shows the open pattern determination table used when selecting the open pattern in each of the 1st hit probability hit and the 2nd hit probability hit. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of a pseudo | simulation series. It is a display screen figure which shows a display state when a hit notice is performed as a prefetch notice effect. FIG. 11 is a diagram for describing the types of background images displayed on the effect display device 9. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st determination table at the time of a normal state deviation, and the 2nd determination table at the time of a normal state deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st determination table at the time-short state deviation, and the 2nd determination table at the time-short state deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the normal state 9R long-term big hit judgment table and the short-time state 9R long-term big hit judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the normal state 9R short-term big hit judgment table and the short-time state 9R short-term big hit judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a normal state small hit determination table and a short time small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command which the microcomputer for game control transmits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which the microcomputer for production control uses. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st start port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd start port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning which is called and performed by each of the 1st start port switch passage processing and the 2nd start port switch passage processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process called and performed in the effect process at the time of winning and a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the area | region which preserve | saves the random number etc. corresponding to the reservation memory used in each of the 1st starting port switch passage process and the 2nd starting port switch passage processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific control content of a pending | holding memory | storage process. It is a figure which shows the structure of an effect side holding | maintenance specific area | region in tabular form. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the aspect of a variable display of a decoration symbol. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding memory | storage display control process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a figure which shows the data table used in order to determine the stop order of production | presentation symbol in latent mode. It is a flowchart which shows the stop order determination process in an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is a timing chart for comparing and producing the effect when the variation display of the normal variation is performed and the effect when the pseudo-variable variation display is performed. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st notice classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice pattern determination table of a hit notice. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 2nd notice classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice pattern determination table of step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect performed according to the content of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a timing chart which shows the control timing of pre-reading notice (continuous notice) and this notice. It is a figure which shows the latent mode determination table used in order to determine the classification of a latent mode. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st special symbol jackpot classification determination table by 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the open pattern determination table by 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process by 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process after S438 of the special winning opening open process by 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the jackpot probability about the 1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol by 3rd Embodiment, random 2, and the jackpot classification selected. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number used for game control by 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the big hit symbol determination table used in order to determine the big hit symbol (hit display result) of the special symbol by 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus at the time of the 1st hit probability big hit, the 2nd hit big hit, and the small hit by 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board | substrate 31 by 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows each characteristic of various big hits and small hits by 7th Embodiment in a table format.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of the gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine, and the gaming medium has passed through the first starting area. After the first execution condition for the variable display based on the first condition is satisfied, the first change for executing the variable display of the first identification information and deriving and displaying the display result based on the satisfaction of the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display. After the second execution condition of the variable display based on the display unit and the game medium passing through the second start area is satisfied, the second identification information is based on the satisfaction of the second start condition that allows the start of the variable display. And a second variation display unit for deriving and displaying the display result, and the display result derived and displayed on the variation display unit in the first variation display unit or the second variation display unit is specified in advance. When the display results Control is made to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, and the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result than the low probability state as the normal state based on the establishment of a predetermined special state occurrence condition is established. Any gaming machine may be used as long as it is controlled to an improved high probability state.

[First Embodiment]
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a predetermined game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area 7. An outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame (not shown) attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8 a (first variation display unit) provided on the lower left side of the game area 7 and the lower right side of the game area 7 are displayed. There is an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of effect symbols synchronized with the variable display of each of the second special symbols on the provided second special symbol display 8b (second variable display unit). The effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device as a variable display unit that performs variable display of effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area as a display area for variably displaying, for example, three decoration (effect) identification information of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In the symbol display area, there are “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. The positions of these symbol display areas are not fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. May be. The three areas of the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R may be adjacent to each other or may be separated from each other.

  Each of the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b is a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. is there. In this embodiment, each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. ing. Such a small display is formed in a square shape, for example. That is, each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9.

  The fluctuation display on each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on the main board. The display of images such as effect symbols on the effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. By these microcomputers, when the first special symbol display 8a is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect display device 9 executes the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed by the device 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device in accordance with the change display. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  In this embodiment, the effect display device 9 will be described using an example using a liquid crystal display device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other devices such as those using CRT, plasma display, electroluminescence or dot matrix display, etc. It may be of the image display type.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b will be described using an example using 7-segment LEDs. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, CRT, plasma display is used. Or an image display type using electroluminescence or dot matrix display. The special symbol display 8 may be a mechanical type such as a rotary drum type display device.

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball apparatus having a second starting winning port (second starting port) 14 through which a game ball can win (pass) is provided below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. 15 is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second start winning port 14 (easy to start winning, easy to pass through the game ball), which is advantageous to the player (first State). In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in a closed state is a disadvantageous state for the player (second state), and the game ball does not win the second start winning port 14 (the game ball does not pass). . Accordingly, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is commonly called “navel”, and the winning to the first start winning opening 13 is called “navel winning”. In addition, the variable winning ball device 15 is commonly referred to as “electric chew”, and the winning of the variable winning ball device 15 to the second start winning port 14 is referred to as “electric chew winning”. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win and the game ball is difficult to pass). It may be configured.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading toward the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided immediately below the effect display device 9, but the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is set to be higher than that of the first starting winning opening 13. May be. Specifically, the space between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further narrowed, nails are densely arranged around the first starting winning opening 13, or the first start winning opening The nail arrangement around 13 is made difficult to guide the game ball to the first start winning port 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning port 14 is higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning port 13. It may be.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  The variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is the first start condition (that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13) or the second start condition (the game ball is the first one) After the 2 start winning opening 14 is established), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed) In a state in which no big hit game is executed), a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed when a predetermined variable display time has elapsed. In the following description, winning in the first start winning opening 13 may be referred to as a first start winning prize, and winning in the second starting winning opening 14 may be referred to as a second start winning prize. Data relating to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is held and stored as hold storage data until the start condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-hold storage data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560 described later.

  Winning is a concept including that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a prize opening and that has passed through the area. The start condition (first start condition, second start condition) is established based on at least the game ball passing through the start area (the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14). If it is. In other words, the start condition is established based on the passage of the game ball in a configuration in which the passed game balls are taken into the start area as in the configuration of the first start winning port 13 and the second start winning port 14. It may be established based on the passing of the game ball in a configuration in which the passed game ball such as a passing gate flows down the game area 7 without being taken into the inside. Deriving and displaying a display result is to stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information) (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). Further, in this embodiment, priority is given to the second start winning opening 14 out of the winning to the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, and the start condition of the variable display is established. Let me. In other words, when there is the second start winning storage data, the start condition for the second start winning variation display is given priority over the starting condition for the first start winning variation display. For example, when priority is given to winning in the second start winning opening 14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in a variable state, and the big hit game is not executed. For example, even if the first reserved memory number is not 0, the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed until the second reserved memory number becomes 0. It is also possible to prioritize winning in the first start winning opening 13 and establish the start condition of the variable display. Also, the variable display start condition may be established in the order in which the start winnings are generated regardless of the winning at the first starting winning port 13 and the winning at the second starting winning port 14.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, during the time of the first special symbol change display time by the first special symbol display 8a, the first decorative symbol as a decorative (design) symbol is displayed in a variable manner. A first decorative symbol display 9a is provided. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a is composed of two LEDs. The first decorative symbol display 9a is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Also, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display unit 8b, during the variation display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 8b, the variation display of the second decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (for production) is performed. A second decorative symbol display 9b is provided. The second decorative symbol display 9b is composed of two LEDs. The second decorative symbol display 9b is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  In addition, a 1st decorative design and a 2nd decorative design may be named generically. Further, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol display.

  The variation of the decorative pattern (variable display) is realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately lit. The fluctuation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the fluctuation display of the first decoration symbol on the first decoration symbol display 9a are synchronized. The variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variation display of the second decorative symbol on the second decoration symbol display 9b are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start point and end point of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side that recalls the big hit on the first decorative symbol display 9a remains lit. When the big-hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side that recalls the big-hit on the second decorative symbol display 9b remains lit. The functions of the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be realized by the effect display device 9. That is, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be controlled to be variably displayed as images on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  On the side of the first decorative symbol display 9a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second decorative symbol display 9b is a second special symbol reserved memory display 18b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. And whenever the fluctuation | variation display by the 2nd special symbol display 8b is started, the number of the indicators to light is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays an area (hereinafter referred to as a summed pending storage display unit 18c) that displays a total number (total number of pending pending memories) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. .) Is provided. Since the summation pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In addition, since the total reserved memory display unit 18c is provided, the first special symbol reserved memory display 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b may not be provided.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. The effect symbol as a symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 corresponding thereto are performed in synchronization. In addition, the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 corresponding thereto are performed in synchronization. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 is made to recall the jackpot. The combination of effect symbols as a specific display result is stopped and displayed. In the effect display device 9, as the combination of effect symbols as the specific display result, for example, the same symbol combination of 7, 7, and 7 (double eyes) is stopped in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. Is displayed.

  In addition, a star-shaped movable member 84 that rotates is provided on the upper side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9. The movable member 84 is a member that is provided at a position that is visible to the player, such as a decorative portion around the effect display device 9, and that operates according to a predetermined effect. More specifically, the movable member 84 is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 88 and is driven and rotates as the motor 88 rotates. The movable member 84 is operated when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied.

  On the right side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, an upper effect LED 85a, a middle effect LED 85b, and a lower effect LED 85c are provided. The upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c execute a display effect related to each re-variation period (including the first variation period) during a single variation period as a specific effect. Blinks when an effect is performed. Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reserved memories are continuously performed although it is a single fluctuation corresponding to one reserved memory. Abbreviation for pseudo-continuous variation.

  In addition, the pseudo-ream is within the variation time determined with respect to one start winning prize in order to make it appear as if multiple symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one starting winning prize. In this case, a special variation pattern (also referred to as a variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are executed a predetermined number of times for all the symbol strings (left, middle, right). For example, the greater the number of repeated re-executions (the total number of changes including the initial change and subsequent re-changes, also referred to as the pseudo-variable number of times), the greater the reliability of the big hit (the difference from the big hit) The ratio of the ratio that is selected when the jackpot is large, the ratio of the ratio that is jackpot, that is, the degree of reliability that is the jackpot) is increased. More specifically, the ratio selected when it is determined that the jackpot is high. In the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, a combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 9 is called a temporary stop symbol combination. The temporary stop symbol combination is determined as one of the pseudo consecutive chances among a plurality of types of chances (hereinafter referred to as pseudo consecutive chances) composed of combinations of symbols other than the jackpot symbol combination. Further, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed, some reach effect may be executed as a final reach state.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the change of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed is continued. This is a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are synchronously changing while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information forms a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable display areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is, for example, in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, when the effect symbols stop in the order of left → middle → right symbols, The same symbol is stopped in the symbol display areas 9L and 9C, and the symbol is not stopped in the symbol display area 9R on the right. The symbols stopped in the left and middle symbol display areas 9L and 9C when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design etc.)) or a display mode (for example, a color etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 9 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is likely to occur compared to a normal reach. Such special (specific) reach is called super reach. Further, when the pseudo continuous variation is executed, the generation ratio of the effect may be changed depending on the number of repeated repetitive executions (the number of pseudo continuous variations). For example, “reach confirmation” when the number of re-variation executions reaches 2 times, “super reach confirmation” when the number of re-variation executions reaches 3 times, and “big hit confirmation” when the number of re-variation executions reaches 4 times. It may be something like

  As a symbol that temporarily stops in the quasi-ream, for example, odd numbers of “1”, “3”, and “5”, and features that are not double-thick like “3”, “4”, and “5” are characteristic A temporary stop symbol is selected. By displaying such a temporary stop symbol, it is possible to appeal the pseudo-ream to the player, and it is possible to appeal the pseudo-ream when temporarily stopping and / or changing again.

  In addition, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided on the left side. The movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect is executed. A vibration motor (not shown) that vibrates the mounting portion of each LED is provided in the vicinity of the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball apparatus 20 using an opening / closing plate that is opened and closed by a solenoid 21 is provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is provided with a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing plate. A first special symbol display 8 a is provided on the left side of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, and a second special symbol display 8 b is provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20. In the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. The open / close plate is controlled to an open state (first state) advantageous to the player in the big hit game state as the specific game state that occurs each time, and the open / close plate is used for the player in a state other than the big hit game state. It is controlled to an unfavorable closed state (second state). The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be in a state where it is difficult to win a prize, but it is possible to win as a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls (prize balls) determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. It has been. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called “normal symbols” (for example, “◯” and “x”).

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variation display on the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on) are turned on alternately to perform variable display. For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Furthermore, in the probability variation state (also referred to as a high probability state) in which the probability (hit probability) determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high, the variation time of the special symbol is shortened over a predetermined period, In addition, the control to display the display result early (normal symbol shortening control) by shortening the normal symbol variation display time (the time from the start of variation to the display result derivation display), the normal symbol stop symbol Control for increasing the probability of winning a symbol (ordinary symbol probability changing control), control for increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and control for increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened ( When it is controlled to be in a short state when (opening number increase control) is performed (probability large hit, second impact likelihood hit, which will be described later) and when it is not controlled in such a short state (first impact likelihood hit, to be described later) There is.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are blinked during the game. In the lower part of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there is provided an out port 26 through which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  At predetermined positions in the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the center position on the front side of the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray 3, an operation button 130 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided. Note that the operation button 130 is not limited to a button that can be pressed, and may be a button that can be rotated, such as a rotary selector, or a touch operation or a press operation, such as a touch panel. It may be a thing, and the thing which can be tilted like a lever type switch may be sufficient. Further, instead of the operation button 130, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. That is, the operation button 130 may be any button that can detect a predetermined operation action by the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a ball striking device for driving a driving motor in response to the player operating the ball striking operation handle 5, and using the rotational force of the driving motor to launch the game ball to the game area 7 (see FIG. Not shown). A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 13 and is detected by the first start port switch 13a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, The first start condition for starting the variable display of one special symbol is established), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the first decorative symbol The display of the first design symbol is started on the display 9a, and the display of the effect design is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2) The second start condition for starting the variation display of the special symbol is established), the second special symbol display unit 8b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol The display of the second decorative symbol is started on the display 9b, and the display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the change display of the second special symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b stops when the variation display time set every time the variation display is performed.

  If the display result (stop symbol) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is a big hit symbol (also referred to as a big hit display result) as a specific display result, a big hit is obtained. When the big hit is made, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shifts from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state where the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened is called a round.

  Specifically, in the big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is set to the open state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is set to the closed state in response to establishment of a predetermined open state end condition (open end condition). When the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until reaching the round (final round) in which the number of releases in the big hit gaming state becomes a predetermined upper limit value. In the case of the present embodiment, in the open state of the special variable winning ball device 20 in the repeated continuation control, the upper limit value of the number of times of opening is the same for all types of jackpots, and is set to a predetermined number such as 9 rounds, for example. Is done.

  In the case of this embodiment, the number of releases in the repeated continuation control when the big hit is the same is the same. Specifically, each jackpot is a nine-round jackpot (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as 9R jackpot) in which the last round is the ninth round and the continuation right is established until the ninth round. The jackpots are classified as follows.

  The 9R jackpot includes a maximum value of the open state time (opening time) in each round, a 9R long-term jackpot set for a predetermined long period (29 seconds), and a period shorter than the predetermined long period (0.5 And the 9R short-term jackpot set in the second).

  In the case of 9R long-term big hits, except for the final round, there are two cases: 29 seconds after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is open, or 10 (predetermined number) game balls have won. When any one of the conditions is satisfied, an end condition for the open state is satisfied, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is closed, and a continuation right is established. As a result, in the case of 9R long-term big hit, as control for opening the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, control that always advances to the ninth round is performed.

  In the case of 9R short-term big hit, except for the final round, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is in an open state, 0.5 seconds elapse, or 10 (predetermined number) game balls are won. When either of the two conditions is satisfied, the open condition end condition is satisfied, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is closed, and the continuation right is established. As a result, in the case of 9R short-term big hit, as control for opening the special variable winning ball apparatus 20, control is always performed to advance to the ninth round.

  The open state of the special variable winning ball device 20 that continues due to the generation of the continuation right differs depending on the type of jackpot, for example, the upper limit of the number of times of opening is different between the probable big hit and the sudden big hit, for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds The predetermined number of times may be set.

  Further, the 9R long-term big hit is divided into a plurality of types of big hit types, that is, a normal big hit that is not controlled to be probabilistic after the big hit gaming state is finished, and a probable big hit that is controlled to be probabilistic after the big hit gaming state is finished.

  Further, the 9R short-term big hit is called a sudden probability change big hit (hereinafter abbreviated as a sudden hit big hit) that is controlled to a probability change state after the big hit gaming state ends. In the big hit gaming state of 9R short-term big hit, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened nine times, but the opening time is extremely short, for example, 0.5 seconds. And after the end of the big hit gaming state of 9R short-term big hit, it is controlled to the probability change state. Therefore, the player suddenly feels that the gaming state suddenly occurs without feeling that a big hit has occurred for the 9R short-term big hit, compared to the case of the 9R long-term big hit with the opening time set to a long time (29 seconds). It feels as if it is in a probabilistic state (suddenly probable state). Therefore, such a short-term big hit is called a sudden probability change big hit, and is further called an abbreviation called a sudden big hit.

  If it is decided to win, a special symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol such as “1”, “3”, “5” or “7”) is stopped and displayed as a specific display result. The At that time, in the effect display device 9, as a combination of specific effect symbols (“left”, “middle”, “right” effect symbols), for example, “7, 7” , 7 ", and the type of the big hit symbol such as" 1, 2, 3 ", the combination of the big hit symbol that gives a chance such as" 1, 2, 3 ") is stopped and displayed. The If it is determined to be a small hit, a predetermined special symbol (for example, a small hit symbol such as “2”) is stopped and displayed. At that time, in the effect display device 9, the same symbol combination as the combination of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when it is determined to be off, a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (for example, a symbol “-”) is stopped and displayed. At that time, the effect display device 9 stops and displays effect symbol combinations other than the jackpot effect symbol combination and the small hit effect symbol combination.

  The display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped is a special jackpot symbol determined in advance among the jackpot symbols. In the case of the probability variation symbol (for example, “7”), in addition to being controlled to the big hit gaming state, after the big hit gaming state, as a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the big hit after the big hit gaming state This is an advantageous state for the player in a probability variation state (hereinafter referred to as a probability variation state) in which the probability is higher than a normal gaming state (a low probability low base state described later) which is a normal state different from the big hit gaming state. Among the 9R long-term big hits, those that become probabilistic after the big hit gaming state ends are called probable big hits. Hereinafter, the probability variation state is also referred to as a high probability state (sometimes abbreviated as a high probability state). Further, the non-probability variation state (state other than the probability variation state) is also referred to as a low probability state (sometimes abbreviated as a low probability state). The probability variation state continues until, for example, a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variation display result. Further, making the player advantageous such that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the probability changing state is also referred to as giving game value. The game value means that, for example, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball, or advantageous for a player who is likely to generate a predetermined winning. To become a good state, to generate a right to be advantageous to the player, to improve the probability of becoming a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player (to make a probable change state) In other words, the game medium payout condition is easily established.

  The special gaming state may be the following gaming state. a State in which the fluctuation time reduction control of the first and second special symbols (control in which the time from the start of fluctuation to the derivation and display of the display result is shorter than the corresponding time in the normal state other than the fluctuation time reduction control state) is performed , B Normal symbol variation time shortening control is performed, c Normal symbol hitting probability is improved Control probability, d When the normal symbol hits, the variable winning ball device 15 is released. Opening time extension control for extending the opening time of one time of the e variable winning ball apparatus 15 in a state where the opening number increasing control for increasing the number of times is performed. The special game state may be a single control of any one of the probability change state and the a to the e, or a control in which two to five states are appropriately combined from the probability change state and the a to e. That is, the special gaming state to be subjected to the control as described above is the occurrence of a predetermined special gaming state such as when the big hit type is determined to be a probable big hit or a sudden big hit in S347 of FIG. Any special gaming state may be used as long as the special gaming state provides a special state advantageous to the player in addition to the specific gaming state when the condition is established.

  Among the 9R long-term big hits, the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol at the time of stopping the variable display on the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is predetermined among the big hit symbols. In the case of a normal symbol (for example, “5”), the probability of winning a big hit after the big hit gaming state does not become a probable change state. Such a thing that does not become a certain change state after the end of the big hit gaming state of 9R long-term big hit is usually called a big hit. In the following description, when “big hit” is simply indicated without specifying the types of big hits, it is a case where these multiple types of big hits are representatively shown.

  For the 9R long-term big hit, regardless of whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit, the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state after the big hit gaming state ends. By doing so, since the variable display time of the first special symbol or the second special special symbol is shortened, the reserved memory number is digested early, and the upper limits of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, respectively. (For example, “4”), it is possible to reduce the state in which the start winnings are invalidated, and it is easy to derive and display the jackpot display result at an early stage by frequently deriving and displaying the display result in a short time. From an efficient viewpoint, the display result of the variable display is likely to be the display result of the jackpot symbol, and the gaming state is advantageous for the player.

  In the short-time state after the end of the jackpot gaming state for the 9R long-term jackpot, as a special gaming state related to the normal symbol, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation until the display of the display result is displayed) is shortened as soon as possible. Control for deriving and displaying the display result (normal symbol shortening control), control for increasing the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol (normal symbol probability changing control), and control for increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time) Extension control) and control for increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened (opening number increase control) are performed. In such a short time state, for example, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of a special symbol fluctuating display is executed and a fluctuating display result is “big hit”, whichever condition is first It ends when it is established. In addition, after the big hit state is ended, the normal state may be set instead of the time reduction state. In addition, as a special game state related to the normal symbol, control that combines any one or a combination of normal symbol shortening control, normal symbol probability changing control, opening time extension control, and opening number increase control is performed. You may do it.

  In the short time state where the special game state relating to such a normal symbol is used, the display time of the normal symbol change is shortened compared to the non-time-short state, and the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased. Based on the fact that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 at the time of winning is lengthened and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 15 at the time of hitting is increased, the variable winning ball device 15 as compared with the normal gaming state. Tends to be in an open state. Therefore, in the short-time state, winning in the second start winning opening 14 (including both cases where the start winning is valid and invalid) is likely to occur, so the number of game balls that have been shot into the game area 7 The ratio of the number of game balls (the number of payout balls) to be paid out as a prize ball according to the winning is larger than the number of hit balls in comparison with the normal game state. In general, the ratio of the number of paid-out balls by winning a prize to the number of shot balls is called “base”. For example, when there are 40 payout balls with respect to 100 shot balls, the base is 40 (%). In the case of this embodiment, for example, a time-short state having a higher base than a non-time-short state such as a normal gaming state is called a high base state, and conversely, a normal gaming state having a lower base compared to such a high base state Such a non-time-short state is called a low base state. The high base state is a high frequency state in which the variable winning ball device 15 is frequently opened, and the low base state is a low frequency in which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened less than the high base state. It can be said that it is a frequency state.

  In addition, after the big hit game state of 9R long-term jackpot, the special symbol time-shortening control is not performed, and any one of the normal symbol shortening control, the normal symbol probability changing control, the opening time extension control, and the opening number increasing control is performed. Or, a combination of any of these may be performed.

  In addition, when the display result of the first special symbol when the variable display is stopped on the first special symbol display 8a is a predetermined first certainty symbol (for example, “1”) among the jackpot symbols The probability of winning a big hit after the big hit gaming state becomes a probable change state, and becomes the first sudden big hit that does not result in a short-time state. If the display result of the first special symbol when the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is stopped is a predetermined second-accuracy symbol (for example, “3”) among the jackpot symbols, The probability of winning a big hit after the gaming state becomes a probable change state, and becomes a second sudden probability big hit that becomes a short-time state.

  The display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol when the variable display is stopped on the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is a small hit symbol (for example, “2”). In some cases, the control state before being controlled to the small hit gaming state is a small hit that is continued. A small hit game state in which the big winning opening is opened nine times with the same opening pattern (opening time 0.5 seconds) as the first big hit and second big hit big hits. Controlled. As a result, the player cannot specify whether it was a small hit, a first big hit or a second big hit from the opening pattern of the big prize opening. Further, when the small hit is reached, the base state as described above does not change from that before the small hit. As a result, even when a small hit game is played with a small hit, it is possible to give the player the impression that a sudden big hit has occurred. That is, the small hit can be used as a so-called false hit that is a big hit. In addition, the small win can create a state (so-called latent probability variation state) in which it cannot be specified whether or not the probability variation has occurred based on the opening pattern of the big winning opening. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved.

  Note that the short-term opening time used for the 9R short-term big hit and the small hit is not limited to 0.5 seconds, and may be set for another short period such as 0.2 seconds.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the second special symbol display 8b may be able to stop display the display result that is a small hit, and may be controlled to the small hit gaming state. In addition, when a small hit is made, the control state before being controlled to the small hit gaming state is continued, but at the time of fluctuation display when the time-short state ends (at the time of the 100th fluctuation display after the start of the time-short state). When a small hit occurs, even if the state before occurrence of the small hit gaming state is a short-time state, the completion of the short-time state termination condition by digestion of the number of variable display times in the short-time state (the 100th change after the start of the short-time state) By executing the display), the control state changes to the normal state after the small hit gaming state.

  In addition, after the big hit state is ended, the normal state may be set instead of the time reduction state.

  The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is ended by changing the open state to the open state for a predetermined period (29 seconds) a predetermined number of times (9 times), and after completion of the big hit gaming state, it is controlled to the normal gaming state or the probability changing state for 9R long term When the big hit is defined as the first game state, the sudden big hit is defined as follows.

  The sudden hit big hit as the second gaming state is ended by changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 to an open state for a period (0.5 seconds) shorter than a predetermined period (29 seconds), and after the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability change Any device can be used as long as it is controlled by the state. In other words, the second gaming state may be a gaming state in which the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be in an open state for a period shorter than the single opening time of the special variable winning ball device 20 in the first gaming state.

  A state that is not a probability variation state and is not a time-short state is a low probability state and a low base state, and is called a low probability low base state. The probable big hit is a big win that becomes a high probability state and a high base state by being in a probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished and being in a short time state. Such a state with a high probability state and a high base state is referred to as a highly accurate high base state. Usually, the big hit is a big hit that does not enter a certain change state after the end of the big hit gaming state and becomes a short time state. Such a state having a low probability state and a high base state is referred to as a low probability high base state. The first sudden hit big hit is a big hit that is in a probable change state after the end of the big hit gaming state and does not become a short-time state. Such a state having a high probability state and a low base state is referred to as a high probability low base state. The second sudden hit big hit is a big hit that becomes a probable change state after the end of the big hit gaming state and becomes a short time state.

  In this way, in addition to when the 9R long-term big hit such as the probable big hit and the normal big hit, when the second sudden big hit is out of the 9R short-term big hit, the predetermined number of times (100 times) after the big hit gaming state ends. Until the variable display is performed, the high base state is set based on the short time state. Further, when the next big hit occurs before the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (100 times), the time reduction state ends at that time. Further, when the first sudden hit big hit of 9R short-term big hit, it becomes a probability change state after the big hit gaming state ends, but since it does not become the short-time state, it becomes a low base state. In addition, when a small hit is made, the probability and base of making a big hit are not changed. For big hits (probable big hits, second hit big hits) that are controlled to a high-accuracy high-base state after the big hit gaming state ends, the short-time state is continued until the next big hit occurs, regardless of the number of fluctuation displays. You may make it control.

  Whether the probability variation state (high probability state) or the non-probability variation state (low probability state) is determined based on whether or not the probability variation flag, which is a flag set in the probability variation state, is set. . Also, whether the time-short state (high base state) or the non-time-short state (low base state) is determined based on whether or not the time-short flag, which is a flag set in the time-short state, is set. Is done.

  In order to enhance the decorative effect of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, It is a symbol having a decorative meaning that is variably displayed with a predetermined relationship with the variation display of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Such a predetermined relationship with respect to the symbol is produced when, for example, variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is started. The relationship in which the variable display of the symbol starts and the display result of the effect symbol when the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is derived and displayed at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Is derived and displayed, and the relationship that the variation display of the effect symbol ends is included. When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a display result by the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b, the effect display device 9 displays the left, middle, and right symbols as zebra eyes (9R long-term The combination of the big hit symbol that is the chance (the big hit hit) constituted by the combination of symbols other than the flat eye is derived and displayed as a display result. Here, the chance is a combination of symbols constituted by combinations of symbols other than the above-mentioned slotted eyes, and is determined in advance as a display result that provides a chance to the player. Further, when a predetermined small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a display result by the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b, the same chance as the case of the sudden big hit by the effect display device 9 is obtained. A combination of small hit symbols is derived and displayed as a display result. Such a display result of the jackpot symbol by the special symbol and the display result of the combination of the jackpot symbol by the effect symbol are referred to as a jackpot display result. In addition, the display result of the small hit symbol display by the special symbol and the display result of the combination of the small hit symbol by the effect symbol are referred to as the small hit display result.

  The first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b and the effect display device 9 have the correspondence relationship as described above. Therefore, in the following description, these are collectively referred to as a variation display unit. Sometimes called.

  In addition, with respect to the effect display device 9, there is a case where a big hit notice is performed, which is a notice effect for giving a notice of a big hit. As the notice effect, there may be a pre-read notice as the first notice effect and a current notice as the second notice effect. The pre-reading notice is pre-read before the fluctuating display that triggers the occurrence of the big hit according to the pre-reading determination result, in accordance with the pre-reading determination result. This is a notice for notifying that the change display is a big hit. Here, the prefetching is performed by reading the random number extracted value prior to the timing of making a determination related to various game controls based on the random number extracted value at the start of variation, and subsequently determining based on the read extracted value. This means that a determination result that is likely to be determined is determined (for example, whether or not the extracted value matches a predetermined determination value). Further, the prefetch determination result refers to a determination result obtained by prefetching. In this embodiment, based on the value of the random number extracted at the time of the start winning, the big hit determination result (disconnected, big hit, small hit), the big hit type determination result (surprise big hit, normal big hit, probability variable big hit) Then, control for prefetching the variation pattern type (including the presence / absence of reach) to obtain a prefetch determination result is executed. Such a prefetch notice is continuously performed over a plurality of variable displays, and is also referred to as a continuous notice. In addition, the current notice is a notice as a fluctuating notice effect for notifying that a big hit will occur in the fluctuation display (current fluctuation display) that triggers a big hit (you may give a notice that it will be a big hit) . Note that the pre-reading notice may be a notice effect in which notice of notice is given in one variable display without performing continuous notice.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 57. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates the random data at random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 includes an ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). ) Is used as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Also, an input driver circuit for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a and 39a to the game control microcomputer 560. 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. Also, an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, which variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10, which variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (effect control microcomputer 100 described later) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the contents of the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Upon receiving the effect control command, display control of the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b for displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner and display control of the effect display device 9 for displaying the dynamic symbols in a variable manner are performed. The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 receives an operation detection signal from the operation button 130 and performs various effects such as a notice effect described later in accordance with the signal.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 performs display control of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board 6 and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. At the same time, the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 is provided with a ROM), and the relay board. An effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to a capture signal (effect control INT signal) from the main board 31 input via 77. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  An operation signal from the operation button 130 is input to the effect control microcomputer 100 via the input port 107. As will be described later, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs a game effect such as a notice effect based on an operation signal from the operation button 130.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads the image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 is provided in the vicinity of the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c, and drives the vibration motors 87a, 87b, 87c that vibrate attachment portions of the respective LEDs via the output port 106. The vibration motor 87a vibrates the upper effect LED 85a. The vibration motor 87b vibrates the middle effect LED 85b, and the vibration motor 87c vibrates the lower effect LED 85c. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 88 to operate the movable member 84 via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, current is supplied to the decoration LED 25, the upper effect LED 85a, the middle effect LED 85b, and the lower effect LED 85c provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time-series manner in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high. Then, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether or not the contents of the program are valid, and then performs step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S). ) The main process after 1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (S4), the RAM 55 is made accessible. Set (S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not in an on state, whether or not data protection processing for the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (S7). If it is confirmed that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process (S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing of S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  In addition, when the power supply is restored, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command (power failure restoration 1 designation command) as a command indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80 (S43). Then, the process proceeds to S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 55 (S12).

  By the processing of S11 and S12, an initial value is set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to a control state such as a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the effect control board 80 (S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 notifies the fact that the control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been initialized in the effect display device 9. Screen display, that is, initialization notification. In the initialization process, the CPU 56 also transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation (demonstration) command.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs processing according to a random number circuit setting program to make settings for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random number for random determination (random R).

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (S15). That is, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (S17) and the initial value random number update process (S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. (S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern or the like, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. . The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol (normal symbol determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 is a game device such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 In a process controlled by the above, or a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for normal symbol determination is one round (random number acquisition). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In the game control microcomputer 560 according to the present embodiment, hardware random numbers by a built-in random number circuit 503 are used as a jackpot determination random number generation counter. Therefore, such initial values are not set for the jackpot determination random number. However, when the game control microcomputer 560 uses a software random number as the big hit determination random number generation counter, the initial value may be set using the initial value random number as described above. . In this case, since the initial value after the jackpot determination random number generation counter advances to the maximum value becomes a random value, the same random number value as the jackpot determination value is illegally taken out and the jackpot is won. It is possible to make it difficult for an illegal act to occur.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been turned on) is executed (S20). The power-off signal is output when, for example, the power monitoring circuit 920 mounted on the power board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the pachinko game 1. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, A switch process for determining these states is executed (S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute.

  Also, a determination random number update process is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for determining a normal winning symbol used for game control (S23). The CPU 56 further executes an initial value random number update process (S24) and a display random number update process (S25) for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an effect control command control process for sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23 and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a. Execute (S30). Specifically, the CPU 56 pays out in response to a winning detection based on one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23 and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the control board 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. An output process for outputting the contents to the output port is executed (S31).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S32). For example, if the change speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol and the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. 2 Executes the variable display of special symbols.

  In S32, instead of starting the variation of the special symbol based on the start flag being set, the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating the special symbol variation processing after the variation pattern is determined (specifically, 3) (or a value indicating the display result specifying command transmission process (specifically, 2)), the special symbol may be changed. Then, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag becomes a value indicating the special symbol stop process (specifically, 4), the variation of the special symbol may be stopped. By doing so, the start flag and the end flag can be eliminated, and the required capacity of the RAM 55 can be reduced.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  In S33, the normal symbol change is not started based on the start flag being set, but the normal symbol process flag value becomes a value indicating the normal symbol changing process. You may make it start the fluctuation | variation of a symbol. Then, based on the fact that the value of the normal symbol process flag becomes a value indicating the normal symbol stop process, the variation of the normal symbol may be stopped. By doing so, the start flag and the end flag can be eliminated, and the required capacity of the RAM 55 can be reduced. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of S21 to S33 (excluding S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used for game control. Each random number is used as follows. Random R is a random counter for determining big hits / small hits that determines whether or not to make big hits and whether to make small hits. Random R is updated one by one at 10 MHz, is added and updated from 0, and is added and updated to its upper limit of 65535, and then is added and updated again from 0.

  Random 2 is a random number generated by a random counter for generating a random number for determining the big hit type for determining (determining) the big hit type (probability big hit, first sudden hit big hit, second sudden hit big hit, normal big hit). . Random 3 is a random number generated by a random counter for generating a random number for determining a variation pattern type for determining the type (type) of the variation pattern. Random 4 is a random number generated by a random counter for generating a random number for determining a variation pattern that determines a variation pattern (variation time). Random 5 is a random number generated by a random counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 6 is a random number generated by a random counter for generating a random number for determining a random 5 initial value for determining an initial value of random 5. Random 7 is generated by a random counter for generating random numbers for determining the openness of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 for determining the open pattern of the special variable winning ball device 20 in the big hit gaming state such as the first big hit big hit and the second big hit big hit. A random number to be generated. Note that a jackpot type and an opening pattern are associated in advance, and a data table indicating the relationship between the corresponding jackpot type and opening pattern and a predetermined random counter determination value is provided. Based on this, the type of jackpot and the opening pattern may be selected and determined at a time. In this way, the above random 2 and random 7 can be substituted with a common random counter.

  Random numbers 2, 5, and 7 are incremented by 1 every 2 msec. Random numbers 3, 4 and 6 are incremented by 1 every 2 msec and the remaining time of interrupt processing. Each of such random R, 1 to 7 can extract one piece of numerical data from the numerical data in the numerical range by sequentially updating the numerical data in the predetermined numerical range at a predetermined update cycle. Realized by a counter.

  In S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 determines (random 2) big hit type determination random number, (random 5) normal symbol per determination random number, and sudden release pattern determination. A counter for generating a random number for use (random 7) is counted up (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 3, random 4) or initial value random numbers (random 6). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. In addition, for the big hit type determination random number, an initial value may be set using the initial value random number as described above. In this case, since the initial value after the big hit type determination random number generation counter advances to the maximum value becomes a random value, the same random number as the big hit type determination value that is probable is illegally targeted. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudulent act that causes a jackpot of a certain type to be taken out.

  In addition, when updating the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 3) and the random number for variation pattern determination (random 4), the value of the hardware random number generated by the random number circuit 503 installed in the game control microcomputer 560 is used. Then, the addition value is determined, and at least one of the variation pattern type determination random number (random 3) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 4) may be updated by adding the determined addition value. By doing so, it is not necessary to generate a software random number for addition value for updating at least one of the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 3) and the random number for variation pattern determination (random 4). can do. Therefore, the variation pattern type determination random number (random 3) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 4) can be updated at random without increasing the processing load on the game control microcomputer 560. Here, the variation pattern type refers to distinguishing the variation pattern according to the type, or the distinction. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type is classified into several groups based on predetermined conditions. This is a distinction that shows a rough distribution of fluctuation patterns. More specifically, in the present embodiment, a variation pattern type is used that is distinguished by variation display types such as presence / absence of reach and the type of reach (normal reach, super reach, etc.).

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing various determination tables such as a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. In FIG. 7, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 7A is set as a big hit determination value in the normal jackpot determination table, and is described in the right column of FIG. 7A in the probability change big hit determination table. Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. As shown in FIG. 7A, a larger number of jackpot determination values is set when the probability is changing than when normal. When the value extracted from the random R matches one of the determination values “1000 to 1080” or “13320 to 13477”, it is determined that the game is a big hit regardless of whether or not it is a probability change. The determination value within the range of “1000 to 1080” or “13320 to 13477” is a common jackpot determination value regardless of the probability state.

  FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table stored in the ROM 54. The small hit determination table includes a first special symbol determination table used for the first special symbol small hit determination and a second special symbol determination table used for the second special symbol small hit determination. In the first special symbol determination table, each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 7B is set as the small hit determination value, and in the second special symbol determination table, the numerical value shown in FIG. Each numerical value described in the right column is set as a small hit judgment value. The small hit determination is performed by determining whether or not the value extracted from the random R matches the small hit determination value set according to the gaming state. When it is determined that they match, the small hit gaming state is controlled. As shown in FIG. 7B, the number of small hit determination values is set more for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol.

The numerical values described in FIGS. 7A and 7B are the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value.
The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as a random R value. The random R value is set to one of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. If they match, the special symbol is determined to be a big hit (normal big hit, probability variation big hit, first sudden hit big hit, or second hit big hit). Further, when the value of the random R matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. Note that “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B indicate the probability (ratio) of big hit or small hit, respectively. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, but the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display. It may also be determined whether the stop symbol in the symbol display 8b is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol.

  FIG. 7C is an explanatory diagram showing a first special symbol low-probability jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. The first special symbol low-probability jackpot type determination table is a random number for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variation display result of the first special symbol is a big-hit symbol at a low probability in the normal state. Based on random 2), this is a table that is referred to in order to determine the type of big hit as one of "first big hit big hit", "second big hit big hit", "probable big hit", or "normal big hit" . The first special symbol low-probability jackpot type determination table is a numerical value to be compared with a random 2 value, which is “first hit probability big hit”, “second hit probability big hit”, “probability big hit”, “normal big hit” The determination value (big hit type determination value) corresponding to each of these is set. When the value of random 2 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  FIG. 7D is an explanatory diagram showing a first special symbol high probability jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. The first special symbol high-probability jackpot type determination table is a random number for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variation display result of the first special symbol is a big-hit symbol at a high probability of being probabilistic. Based on random 2), this is a table that is referred to in order to determine the type of big hit as one of "first big hit big hit", "second big hit big hit", "probable big hit", or "normal big hit" . In the first special symbol high probability big hit type determination table, a numerical value to be compared with a random 2 value, which is “first big hit big hit”, “second big hit big hit”, “probable big hit”, “normal big hit” The determination value (big hit type determination value) corresponding to each of these is set. When the value of random 2 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  In such a determination table, the common points between the low probability and the high probability are the following points. The selection ratio of the 9R short-term big hit consisting of the first sudden hit big hit and the second sudden hit big hit and the 9R long-term big hit consisting of the probability varying big hit and the normal big hit are set to the same ratio. Further, the selection ratio for probability variation jackpot and the selection ratio for normal jackpot are set to the same selectivity. Further, the selection ratios for the big hits that become the probability variation states including the probability variation big hits, the first sudden hit big hits, and the second sudden hit big hits are set to the same selectivity. On the other hand, the difference between the low probability and the high probability is as follows. Each of the selectivity for the first critical hit and the selectivity for the second critical hit is set to a different selectivity. Specifically, at the time of low probability, the selection rate of the first bump accuracy hit is higher than that of the second hit accuracy hit, and at the time of high probability, the selection rate of the second bump accuracy hit is higher than that of the first bump accuracy hit. The selection rate is set so that.

  FIG. 7E is an explanatory diagram showing a second special symbol jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. The second special symbol jackpot type determination table determines the type of jackpot based on a random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variation display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot symbol. This table is referred to in order to determine either “probable big hit” or “normal big hit”. The second special symbol jackpot type judgment table is a numerical value to be compared with a random 2 value, and a judgment value corresponding to each of “probable big jackpot” and “normal jackpot” (big jackpot type judgment value) is set. Yes. When the value of random 2 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value. Further, as shown in (C) to (E) of FIG. 7, the winning at the first start winning opening 13 is controlled at a higher rate than the winning at the second starting winning opening 14 at the second sudden probability big hit. Is done. As a result, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are controlled at a high base state after the big hit game state of the sudden hit big hit, the big hit game state of the sudden big hit for each special symbol It becomes possible to characterize the control content after completion.

  In the second special symbol jackpot type judgment table, unlike the first special symbol jackpot type judgment table, judgment values corresponding to the sudden jackpots such as “first sudden hit big hit” and “second sharp hit big hit” are not set. . Therefore, when a big hit is made based on the fluctuation display result of the second special symbol, the big hit types of “first hit probability big hit” and “second hit probability big hit” are not selected, and there is no case where the “big hit big hit” is controlled. . As a result, the type of jackpot controlled according to the variation display result is partially different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Thus, by preventing the occurrence of “first hit probability hit” and “second hit probability hit” in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is provided in the time-short state. The second special symbol variation display is executed more frequently at the second start winning opening 14 and the probability that the 9R long-term big hit such as “probable big hit” and “normal big hit” will be increased. It is possible to increase the ball-out rate and improve the interest of the game.

  It should be noted that the same configuration (“first sudden hit big hit”, “second sudden hit big hit”, “probable big hit”, and the case where the first special symbol variation display is performed and the second special symbol variation display is performed. , A configuration that allows selection of either “normal jackpot”), in each of the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol, Any of “second sudden hit big hit”, “probability big hit”, and “normal big hit” may be determined as the big hit type. When determining such a big hit type, the respective selection rates of “first big hit big hit” and “second big hit big hit” in the second special symbol are “first big hit big hit” in the first special symbol. ”And“ second sudden hit big hit ”may be set to be smaller than the respective selection rates. For the second special symbol, the selection rate of“ first sudden hit big hit ”is set to“ 0 ”in the quick hit big hit. In other words, it may be set such that only the “second sudden hit big hit” can be selected at a predetermined selection rate.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the jackpot probability, random 2 (0 to 19), and the selected jackpot type for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  In the first special symbol and the second special symbol, regardless of whether the big hit probability is high or low, the big hit selection rate (80% in total) that results in a probable change state consisting of the first big hit probability hit, the second big hit probability big hit, and the probable big hit The determination value of random 2 is set so that the relationship with the selection ratio (20%) of the jackpot that does not become a probability variation state that is usually a jackpot is the same. For the variation display of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a jackpot that is in a probable variation state is selected with a high probability of 80%, for example. Therefore, the random 2 determination value is set so that the probability of occurrence of the probability variation state is high and the proportion of occurrence of the probability variation state is high when any type of big hit is achieved.

  In addition, for the second special symbol, regardless of whether the big hit probability is high or low, the random 2 decision value is set so that the relationship between the probability change probability selection rate (80%) and the normal big hit selection rate (20%) is the same. Is set. For the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, regardless of whether or not it is in the probability variation state, probability variation big hit is selected as the big hit type with a constant high probability of 80%, for example. Therefore, at the time of high base where the frequency of winning an electric chew is higher than that at the time of low base, the probability that probability variation big hit is selected as the big hit type becomes high.

  For the first special symbol, a random 2 decision value is set so that the relationship between the selection rate for probable big hit (20%) and the normal big hit selection rate (20%) is the same regardless of the level of the big hit probability. Has been. For the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, regardless of whether or not it is in the probability variation state, probability variation big hit is selected as the big hit type with a constant low probability of 20%, for example. For the first special symbol, a random 2 decision value is set so that the selection rate for probability variation big hit is lower than that of the second special symbol, regardless of whether the big hit probability is high or low. Therefore, for the second special symbol, the probability that the probability variation big hit is selected as the big hit type is higher than that of the first special symbol.

  In addition, for the first special symbol, regardless of the probability of big hit, the total selection rate (total 60%) of 9R short-term big hit (first hit big hit, second hit big hit) and 9R long-term big hit (probable big hit, normal big hit) The determination value of random 2 is set so that the relationship with the total selection rate (total of 40%) is the same. For the first special symbol, a random 2 determination value is set so that the selectivity for the 9R short-term big hit is higher than that of the second special symbol, regardless of whether the big hit probability is high or low. For example, the selection rate per 9R short-term jackpot of the first special symbol is set to 60%, and the selection rate per 9R short-term jackpot of the second special symbol is set to 0%.

  In addition, for the first special symbol, the selection rate (50%) for the first probability maximum hit in the low probability state (normal state) is the high probability state (probability variation state) for the type of the likelihood hit. The determination value of random 2 is set so as to be higher than the selection rate (10%) per first sudden probability big hit. On the other hand, for the first special symbol, when the selection rate (50%) for the second probability maximum hit is in the low probability state (normal state) in the high probability state (probability variation state) with respect to the type of the likelihood hit. The determination value of random 2 is set so as to be higher than the selection rate (10%) per second sudden likelihood. Therefore, regarding the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, when the low probability state is selected, the frequency of selecting the first likelihood big hit is high, and when the high probability state is selected, the frequency of selecting the second likelihood big hit is high.

  Regarding the variable display of the first special symbol, the random determination values (0 to 11) are assigned to the first and second maximum likelihood hits as follows. Random 2 “0, 1” is commonly assigned to the first chance big hit at low probability and high probability. Random 2 “0, 1” is commonly assigned to the first chance big hit at low probability and high probability. Random “10, 11” is assigned to the second hit probability big hit in common at low probability and high probability. The random numbers “2 to 9” are assigned to the first likelihood big hit when the probability is low, and are assigned to the second likelihood big hit when the probability is high.

  Note that the following processing may be performed without providing the two jackpot type determination tables separately for the probability change and the normal time as shown in FIG. Regardless of whether the big hit probability is high or low, the random 2 “0, 1” is determined as the first sudden hit big hit, and the random 2 “10, 11” is determined as the second quick hit big hit. For the random numbers “2 to 9”, the type determination is made to determine the temporary hit probability big hit that does not specify either the first or second hit big hit. Then, when it is determined that the temporary hit probability big hit, after that, at a predetermined timing such as the start time of the big hit gaming state, a process is performed to check whether the current big hit probability is a low probability or a high probability, When the probability is low, it is determined as the first hit probability big hit, and when the probability is high, the second hit probability big hit is determined. In the case of performing such processing, it is only necessary to provide one jackpot type determination table without dividing the jackpot type determination table into the probable change time and the normal time and determine the jackpot type. Further, when such a process is performed, the above-described determination may be sequentially performed in specific steps of the control program without providing the big hit type determination table. Further, when it is determined that the temporary hit probability big hit, a process for storing information for specifying a gaming state (low probability state, high probability state) when the big hit gaming state is started, for example, a predetermined timing in the special symbol stop process (For example, it is determined that the jackpot flag is set in S133 of FIG. 32 described below and before executing S134), and the stored information is read at the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the stored information identifies the low probability state. In some cases, it is determined that the first collision probability big hit is set, and only the probability variation flag is set. When the stored information is specified when the probability is high, the second collision probability big hit is determined and the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set. Moreover, in this example, the example which selects the jackpot type and selects the display result of the special symbol according to the selected jackpot type was shown. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a random number for determining a special symbol, a special symbol determining value, a display result of the special symbol, and a data table in which the relationship between the jackpot type is set in advance, and a random number for determining the special symbol is extracted, Based on the extracted value, a process of determining a display result of special symbols having a corresponding relationship and a jackpot type at a time may be performed. If it does in this way, it will become possible to determine the display result of special symbols, and the jackpot type using one counting means.

  Next, the characteristics of each of the big hits and the small hits provided in plural types will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the characteristics of various types of big hits and small hits in a tabular format.

  For normal jackpots, the display result of the production symbol is combined with a combination of doubles for the normal jackpot display result (for example, any combination of even symbols such as “2, 2, 2” on the left, middle and right). It is decided to do. Normally, when the big hit is made, the low probability and high base state is controlled after the big hit gaming state. Normally, the number of times the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened when it is a big hit is nine. The high base state ends after the special symbol variation display is executed 100 times, and then shifts to the low base state.

  For the probable big hit, the display result of the production symbol is combined with a combination of double eyes for the probable big hit display result (for example, any odd symbol combination such as “7, 7, 7” for the left, middle, and right). It is decided to do. When the probable big hit is reached, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the high probable high base state is controlled. The number of times that the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened when the probable big hit is 9 is. The high base state ends after the special symbol variation display is executed 100 times, and then shifts to the low base state. When the probable big hit is achieved, after the big hit gaming state is finished, an effect to notify that the probable state is in effect is performed. It should be noted that the high base state (short time state) at the time of the probability variation big hit may be controlled to continue until the next big hit occurs, similarly to the probability variation state.

  For the first and second big hits, the display results of the production symbols are displayed for the big hit display results such as “1, 2, 3” or “3, 2, 1” on the left, middle and right, for example. It is determined to be any one of a plurality of chances determined in advance as the chances. The number of times the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened when the first hit probability hit and when the second hit probability hit is nine. When the first hit big hit is achieved, the high hit low base state is controlled after the big hit gaming state.

  For small hits, the display result of the production symbol is determined in advance as a chance item for an abrupt big hit display result such as “1, 2, 3” or “3, 2, 1” on the left, middle, and right. It is determined to be one of a plurality of chances and the same chance. When the small hit is achieved, after the small hit gaming state, both the big hit probability and the base state are not changed from those before the start of the small hit gaming state. The number of times the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened when the small hit is reached is nine times as in the case of the big hit.

  Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 at the time of the first hit probability hit, the second hit probability hit, and the small hit will be described. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 at the time of the first hit probability hit, the second hit probability hit, and the small hit.

  Referring to FIG. 10, as shown in FIG. 10A, the opening pattern at the time of small hitting is as follows. An open pattern that is performed once. For each of the opening patterns of the first and second big hits, one of the opening patterns A and B is selected every time the big hit is made. Executed.

  The opening pattern A in (B) is the same opening pattern as the small hitting opening pattern, and the control to the round that becomes the opening state for 0.5 seconds is performed through the closing state for 0.5 seconds. Performed once. The opening pattern B in (C) is the same opening pattern as the opening pattern A in the first to eighth rounds. In the ninth round, the control to the opening state for 0.5 seconds is 0.5. It is performed twice via a second-second closed state. That is, in the opening pattern B, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened twice in the ninth round. Thereby, in the opening pattern B, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened 10 times in total.

  For each of the first hit probability hit and the second hit probability hit, an opening pattern is selected at the following ratio. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an opening pattern determination table used when selecting an opening pattern for each of the first and second maximum likelihood hits.

  In FIG. 11, (A) shows a release pattern determination table for the first sudden hit, which is a data table used when selecting an open pattern for the first sudden hit, and (B) shows an open pattern for the second sudden hit. 2 shows a data table for use in selecting the second sudden probability big hit release pattern determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 54.

  In each of the determination tables shown in (A) and (B), a random 7 determination value for determining the open pattern A is assigned to each of the open pattern A and the open pattern B, and the random values extracted at a predetermined timing are assigned. The release pattern corresponding to the determination value corresponding to the numerical data of 7 is selected and used as the release pattern in the big hit gaming state.

  As shown to (A), when it becomes the 1st sudden probability big hit, the ratio with which the open pattern A is selected rather than the open pattern B is high. Further, as shown in (B), when the second hit probability is a big hit, the ratio of the opening pattern A selected is higher than the opening pattern B. In addition, the rate at which the opening pattern A is selected is higher when the first hit probability hit is higher than when the second hit probability hit is reached. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled in the opening pattern A, the player can determine that the ratio of the first hit probability big hit is high. On the other hand, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled with the opening pattern B, the player can determine that the ratio of the second hit probability big hit is high.

  In this way, the opening pattern in the 9R short-term big hit may be the same pattern as the opening pattern in the small hit like the opening pattern A. The player may be unable to determine whether there is any. In such a case, the effect display device 9 may control to the latent mode as the effect mode for producing the latent probability changing state, and may display that the probability changing state may be latent. Here, the “probability change state is latent” is difficult to specify whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a certain change state in the apparent operating state, but is controlled to the probability change state as the internal control state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 By doing so, it shows an operation state as if the probability variation state is hidden.

  In addition, the open pattern in the 9R short-term big hit may be a pattern similar to the open pattern in the small hit (open pattern A), such as the open pattern B. Therefore, if the open pattern is not observed accurately, the big hit The player may not be able to determine whether it is a small hit or a small hit. Even in such a case, the effect display device 9 may be controlled to the latent mode as the effect mode for producing the latent probability changing state, and may display that the probability changing state may be latent. is there.

  Data indicating the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 (opening pattern data) is stored in the ROM 54 in association with each jackpot type. For example, 9R long-term big hit release pattern data is stored as the open patterns corresponding to the normal big hit and the probability variation big hit. An opening pattern A is stored as an opening pattern corresponding to the small hit. In addition, as the opening patterns corresponding to the first and second likelihood hits, the opening pattern A and the opening pattern B determined as described above are stored, and according to the selection determination as described above, The open pattern used is determined. The opening pattern data includes data specifying the number of rounds, data specifying the opening time in each round, and data specifying the interval time as the closing time between rounds, and specifies the opening pattern. As for the opening pattern B, since the grand prize opening is opened twice in the ninth round, the opening time of the round is the time from the start of the first opening to the end of the opening of the second time. Is set as Furthermore, for the release pattern B, as the release pattern data, for the ninth round, the first release end data specifying the end of the first release and the second start data specifying the second release start time Is further included.

  Next, a variation pattern of pseudo-variable variation display will be described. FIG. 12 is a timing chart showing an example of a variation pattern of pseudo-variable variation display. FIG. 12 shows, as an example, a pseudo-variation variation pattern in which re-variation is performed three times.

  In the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, the start of variation display is the start of the first variation. Then, after one temporary stop is performed, the first re-variation is performed. At the time of temporary stop, the effect display device 9 temporarily stops the combination of temporary stop symbols forming the above-described pseudo consecutive chances. In the pseudo-continuous variation pattern, for example, temporary stop and re-variation are performed for the number of times set in the variation pattern, and at the end of the last re-variation, the effect display device 9 performs the above-described big hit determination or small variation. Depending on the determination result of the hit determination, the combination of the big hit symbol or the combination of the off symbol is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol (definite stop symbol). When the variation pattern is reach, the reach display device 9 displays the reach symbol at the time of the last re-variation, and the reach state is achieved. The reach effect may be performed at the time of re-variation other than the last re-variation.

  Next, a display example of the notice effect of the jackpot notice executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, the prefetch notice will be described. The pre-reading notice includes a plurality of notice types including a notice type called a hit notice and a notice type called a button notice. Each notice type of hit notice and button notice belongs to a plurality of notice patterns, and the notice effect is performed with the notice pattern selected at random.

  In the hitting notice type, a notice effect for notifying that a big hit will be made is performed using an image such as a predetermined character and an on-hold storage display. In the notice type of the button notice, control is performed to change the display mode of the hold storage display on the combined hold storage display unit 18c on the condition that the player has operated the operation button 130.

  FIG. 13 is a display screen diagram showing a display state when a hitting advance notice is executed as a prefetching notice effect.

  In FIG. 13A, in response to the suspension of the special symbol, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. The state is confirmed and the fluctuation display is finished.

  FIG. 13B shows the effect symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols in the variation display of the special symbols. The state where the fluctuation has started is shown.

  FIG. 13 (C) shows a state in which the start storage prize is received during the fluctuation started in FIG. 13 (B) and the hold memory display is added. In FIG. 13C, it is displayed that there are three reserved memories. Note that the reserved storage display added in FIG. 13C is displayed in a different mode (notice mode, for example, black circle) from the normal mode (for example, white circle) of the stored storage display that has already been stored. As shown in FIG. 44, this indicates that the pre-reading notice is performed for the reserved storage displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. When a pre-reading notice is performed, the hold storage display may be displayed in a manner similar to the normal manner.

  In FIG. 13D, in response to the suspension of the special symbol fluctuation, the finalized design symbols (the finalized design symbols) are displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R. It shows a state in which the variable display is stopped due to the stop display.

  FIGS. 13 (E1) and (E2) are when the effect symbol newly started in response to the start of the change of the special symbol is changing and the effect symbol is not stopped in any symbol display area. In addition, the display state when the previous notice is executed as the pre-reading notice is shown. 13 (E1) and 13 (E2) both show that a character (a character 91A in (E1) and a character 91B in (E2)) has a placard with a message “may be in memory”. By appearing, a hit notice is executed.

  Note that the type of characters that appear in the hit notice in FIG. 13 (E1) and the hit notice in (E2) are different. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, the types of characters that appear are selected at different ratios depending on whether or not a big hit is made. In the hit notice, the performance is performed in a notice pattern in which the character 91A shown in FIG. 13 (E1) or the character 91B shown in (E2) appears. Accordingly, it is possible to notify that a big hit has occurred from the stage before the start of the variable display based on the reserved storage that is the subject of the advance notice.

  In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the variable display subject to the notice is displayed, or when the notice effect is executed this time, a placard with a different message such as “Maybe” is given as a winning notice. You may make it appear.

  FIGS. 13G1 and 13G2 are diagrams for explaining a modification example of the hit notice. When a big hit notice is to be made and the hit type is a big hit (probable big hit, first sudden hit big hit or second sudden hit big hit) that is in a probable change state, the big hit in the manner shown in FIGS. 13 (G1) and (G2) When the advance notice (hereinafter referred to as the probable big hit notice) is performed and the hit type is a hit other than the big hit in which the probable state is changed (normal big hit, small hit), the modes shown in FIGS. 13E1 and 13E2 It is also possible to make a promising big hit notice. In FIGS. 13 (G1) and (G2), a probable big hit announcement is executed when a character having a placard with a message “Maybe there is a chance bonus in memory” appears. In this case, the word “chance bonus” indicates that it is a big hit that is probabilistic.

  It should be noted that the type of character that appears differs between the probability change jackpot notice in FIG. 13 (G1) and the probability change jackpot notice in (G2). Depending on the type of character, the reliability of which of the big hits of 9R long-term big hit and the big hit of 9R short-term big hit (first and second big hit big hits) is different. In other words, a notice that specifies the type of jackpot that will be in a probabilistic state depending on the character type (one of the 9V long-term jackpot probability jackpot or the 9R short-term jackpot big jackpot (first or second sudden jackpot)). Is doing. Thereby, it is possible to notify that it is a big hit that becomes a probable change state from the stage before the start of the variable display based on the hold storage to be notified. Similarly, the probability of hitting the 9R long-term jackpot is different from that of the 9R long-term jackpot, and the ratio of selecting the character in the hit notice is different for the 9R short-term jackpot sudden hit (first and second hit big hits). The ratio of selecting the character type in the hit notice may be different from the normal big hit of 9R long-term big hit.

  The pre-reading notice effect is repeatedly executed every time the change is made until the change display based on the hold memory to be notified is made. Such a notice that is continuously repeated over a plurality of variable displays is called a continuous notice as described above.

  In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect is performed by the continuous notice as shown in FIG. 13, an example is shown in which the reserved storage display that is the target of the pre-read notice is displayed in the notice mode (black circle). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pre-reading notice effect is performed by the continuous notice, the on-hold storage display is not changed to the notice mode (black circle), and the continuous use of the effect of causing the character having the placard to appear for each variable display. A notice may be executed.

  As for the pre-reading notice such as the hit notice and the button notice, the example of performing the big hit notice is shown as the notice. As for the pre-reading notice, a reach notice for notifying that it becomes reach may be performed as a notice.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the effect of the pre-reading notice is executed in a state where all the symbols are still fluctuating after the fluctuating display of the effect symbols is started, for example, at the start of the variable display. 61 (see the timing chart showing the control timing of the pre-reading notice and the current notice shown in 61). In addition, the above-described effect of the previous notice is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the pre-reading notice is executed, such as a predetermined timing after at least one of the effect symbols is stopped ( (See FIG. 61). This is to make it easier for the player to identify whether the notice effect is the pre-read notice or the current notice. Note that the pre-reading notice as the continuous notice may be executed at a timing before the reach is established, and the current notice may be executed at another timing such as a timing after the reach is established.

  This notice includes a plurality of notice types including a notice type called a group notice and a notice type called a step-up notice. Each type of group notice and step-up notice is a kind to which a plurality of notice patterns belong, and a notice effect is performed with a notice pattern selected from the plurality of notice patterns.

  The group notice refers to a notice effect that gives a notice by displaying a group of predetermined character images. As the group notice, for example, a plurality of notice patterns are provided by providing a plurality of types of group characters (characters constituting a group) according to the reliability that is a big hit. And when it is decided to make a group announcement, when the current variation display, which is the target of a big hit, is executed from among a plurality of announcement patterns, is the result of this variation display a big hit? A notice pattern is selected at a different rate depending on the loss, and a notice effect is performed with the selected notice pattern. Further, the step-up notice refers to a notice effect in which a notice effect is given by stepping up a notice effect by a plurality of notice steps.

  Such an effect of the advance notice is determined by a process separate from the above-described prefetch notice. In addition, unlike the pre-reading notice described above, the effect of the current notice is executed, for example, before all symbols of the effect symbol are stopped and at a predetermined timing after at least one symbol is stopped. Thus, the pre-reading notice and the current notice are set so that the execution timings do not overlap.

  Note that the execution timing of the pre-reading notice and the current notice may be performed at any timing as long as they are set to different timings. For example, this time notice is executed in a state where all the symbols are still fluctuating, and the pre-reading notice is executed at a predetermined timing after all the symbols of the production symbol are stopped and after at least one of the symbols is stopped. You may make it perform. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice may be executed before reaching the reach state, and the current notice may be executed after reaching the reach state. Conversely, the advance notice may be executed this time before entering the reach state, and the prefetch notice may be executed after entering the reach state. In addition, each of the pre-reading notice and the current notice may be executed at a timing before at least one symbol stops. In that case, any one of the notices may be executed at the first timing, and the other notice may be executed at a timing later than the first timing.

  Whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice and the current notice is determined by separate processing, but is executed at different timings, so there is no possibility of being executed concurrently in a single variable display. The player can easily recognize the content of the notice effect clearly.

  In FIG. 13, the illustration of the background image of the effect design is omitted, but a plurality of effect design background images are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of effect modes, and are selected according to the effect mode. Is displayed. As the effect mode, a normal mode, a probability change mode, a first latent mode, and a second latent mode are provided.

  The normal mode is an effect mode when the low probability state is other than the first and second latent modes. For example, after the normal big hit, the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode. The probability variation mode is an effect mode when the state is in a high probability state other than the first and second latent modes. For example, after the end of the probability variation big hit and after the end of the second sudden probability big hit, the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode.

  The first latent mode is an effect mode in which the proportion selected from the first and second latent modes included in the latent mode is higher than the second latent mode when the probability variation state is not latent. In contrast, the second latent mode is an effect mode in which the ratio selected from the first latent mode is higher than the first latent mode when the probability variation state is latent, among the first and second latent modes included in the latent mode. For example, the effect mode is controlled to the latent mode after the end of the first big hit and the end of the small hit.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the types of background images displayed on the effect display device 9.
FIG. 14A shows a background image in the normal mode. The background image in the normal mode is composed of an image (sea image) reminiscent of the sea by fish, seaweed, water and the like.

  FIG. 14B is a background image in the probability variation mode. The background image in the probability variation mode includes an image (mountain image) reminiscent of a mountain by mountains, birds, clouds, and the like.

  FIG. 14C is a background image in the first latent mode. The background image in the first latent mode is composed of an image (first night sky image) that recalls the first night sky by the moon, stars, or the like.

  FIG. 14D is a background image in the second latent mode. The background image in the second latent mode is an image (second night sky image) that recalls the second night sky with stars or the like. The background image in the second latent mode is similar to the background image in the first latent mode, but a part of the background image may be different, indicating that the mode is different while giving the player the impression of the same type of mode. It is a possible image.

  The background image as described above is changed according to the effect mode controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Next, a variation pattern table used for selecting and determining the variation pattern of the special symbol and the effect symbol in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described with reference to FIGS. As the fluctuation pattern table, the ROM 54 stores the first determination table when the normal state is shifted, the second determination table when the normal state is shifted, the first determination table when the time-short state is shifted, the second determination table when the time-short state is shifted, and the normal state 9R long-term big hit. Time determination table, short-time state 9R long-term big-hit determination table, normal state 9R short-term big-hit determination table, short-time state 9R short-term big-hit determination table, normal state small-hit determination table, and short-time state small-hit determination table A data table of means is stored and used selectively.

  The first determination table when the normal state is off is used when it is determined that the big hit determination is made in a normal state other than the short-time state, and the number of reserved memories (total number of reserved memories) is 1 to 3. It is a fluctuation pattern table. The second determination table when the normal state is off is used when it is determined that the big hit determination is made in a normal state other than the short-time state and the number of reserved memories (total number of reserved memories) is 4 to 8. It is a fluctuation pattern table. FIG. 15 shows the first determination table when the normal state is off and the second determination table when the normal state is off. In FIG. 15, (a) is a first determination table at the time of deviation from the normal state, and (b) is a second determination table at the time of deviation from the normal state.

  The first determination table at the time short-time state deviation is a variation pattern table used when it is determined that a loss of jackpot determination is made in the time-short state and the number of reserved memories (total number of reserved memories) is 1 to 3. is there. The second determination table at the time shortage state deviation is a variation pattern table used when it is determined that the big hit determination is to be disengaged in the time reduction state and the number of reserved memories (total number of reserved memories) is 4 to 8. is there. FIG. 16 shows the first determination table when the time-short state is off and the second determination table when the time-short state is off. In FIG. 16, (a) is a first determination table at the time-short state deviation, and (b) is a second determination table at the time-short state deviation.

  The normal state 9R long-term big hit determination table is a variation pattern table used when it is determined that the 9R long-term big hit is determined by the big hit determination and the big hit type determination in the normal state other than the short-time state. The short-time state 9R long-term big hit determination table is a variation pattern table used when it is determined that the 9R long-term big hit is determined by the big hit determination and the big hit type determination in the short-time state. The normal state 9R long-term big hit determination table and the short-time 9R long-term big hit determination table are shown in FIG. In FIG. 17, (a) is a normal state 9R long-term big hit judgment table, and (b) is a short-time 9R long-term big hit judgment table.

  The normal state 9R short-term big hit determination table is a variation pattern table used when it is determined to be a sudden big hit by the big hit determination and the big hit type determination in the normal state other than the short time state. The short-time state 9R short-term big hit time determination table is a fluctuation pattern table used when it is determined that the big hit determination and the big hit type determination are to be a sudden big hit in the short-time state. The normal state 9R short-term big hit determination table and the short-time 9R short-term big hit determination table are shown in FIG. In FIG. 18, (a) is a normal state 9R short-term big hit judgment table, and (b) is a short-time state 9R short-term big hit judgment table.

  The normal state small hit determination table is a variation pattern table used when it is determined that the small hit is determined by the small hit determination in the normal state other than the short time state. The short-time state small hit time determination table is a variation pattern table used when it is determined that the small hit is determined by the small hit determination in the short-time state. The normal state small hit determination table and the short time small hit determination table are shown in FIG. In FIG. 19, (a) is a normal state small hit determination table, and (b) is a short time small hit determination table.

  Each of the tables shown in FIGS. 15 to 19 includes a variation pattern type determination table indicating the relationship between the random 3 and the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern indicating the relationship between the random pattern 4 and each variation pattern for each variation pattern type. And a determination table.

  In each of the first determination table at the time of deviation from the normal state and the second determination table at the time of deviation from the normal state shown in FIG. In this way, the variation patterns are classified into a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variation pattern effects.

  In the variation pattern column in each table of FIGS. 15 to 19, “no pseudo-continuation” is a variation pattern in which pseudo-continuation is not performed. “Normal fluctuation” indicates a fluctuation display that does not become reach but shifts. “Slip” is to change the left, middle and right symbols, then temporarily stop and display two or more symbols, and then change the number of symbols temporarily displayed and then stop and display them again. Thus, a variable display is shown in which an effect table for changing the effect symbol so that the symbol slides and stops is displayed.

  “Normal” indicates a normal reach as a variation pattern that is reached during a change but stops without a reach effect by a character or the like as in the case of super reach described later. “Super A” indicates super reach A as a variation pattern for performing super reach using the first character. “Super A” indicates super reach B as a variation pattern for performing super reach using the second character.

  “Special Super A” is a super reach in which the first character is used to perform the same effect as Super Reach A in a shorter variation time than “Super A”, and a combination of reach symbols is temporarily displayed during the variation display. After the display, the special super reach A is shown as a special variation pattern that displays the chances as the combination of the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol combination when the symbols are replaced. “Special Super B” is a super reach that uses the second character to perform the same effects as Super Reach B in a shorter variation time than “Super B”. After the display, the special super reach B is shown as a special variation pattern that displays the chances as the combination of the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol combination when the symbols are replaced.

  The “pseudo sequence once” is a variation pattern in which re-variation is performed once in the pseudo sequence. “Pseudo-continuous twice” is a variation pattern in which re-variation is performed twice in the pseudo-continuous. The “pseudo sequence 3 times” is a variation pattern in which re-variation is performed 3 times in the pseudo sequence. The “pseudo sequence 4 times” is a variation pattern in which re-variation is performed 4 times in the pseudo sequence. “Out of” is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a “out of” display result.

  Based on these pieces of information, for example, the variation pattern of “no super-sequential super A out-of-sequence” is “a variation pattern that results in out-of-order display after super reach A in a non-pseudo-variable display”. Is shown.

  Next, the relationship between the lengths of fluctuation times in a plurality of fluctuation patterns is described. The length of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern in which the re-variation is performed in the pseudo-series is increased as the number of re-variations increases, such as 1 pseudo-series <2 pseudo-series <3 pseudo-series <4 pseudo-series. Is set to The variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns of “normal A” and “normal B” are the variation patterns of “reach” such as “normal reach”, “super reach A”, and “super reach B”. The variation time is generally set to be shorter than the variation pattern belonging to. In addition, the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern type of “super reach” such as “super reach A” and “super reach B” generally has a variation time longer than the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern type of “normal reach”. Is set to be longer.

  In the tables of FIG. 15 to FIG. 19, the columns labeled “Random 3 Range” and “Variation Pattern Type” include a variation pattern type determination table indicating the relationship between “Random 3 Range” and “Variation Pattern Type”. It is a column to show. For example, taking FIG. 15A as an example, each of a plurality of variation pattern types such as “normal A”, “normal B”, “normal reach”, “super reach A”, and “super reach B”, respectively. In addition, all the values of random 3 (0 to 109) are a numerical value range indicated by r1, a numerical value range indicated by r2, a numerical value range indicated by r3, a numerical value range indicated by r4, and a numerical value indicated by r5. It is divided into multiple numerical ranges such as ranges. For example, when the value of random 3 extracted at a predetermined timing matches any numerical value in the numerical range of r4, it is determined that the variation pattern type is “super reach A”.

  In each of the tables of FIGS. 15 to 19, the columns described as “random 4 range” and “variation pattern” indicate a variation pattern determination table indicating the relationship between “random 4 range” and “variation pattern”. It is a column. The variation patterns shown corresponding to each type of variation pattern type determination table are variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 15A as an example, the fluctuation patterns belonging to the type of “normal reach” are “normal deviation without pseudo-continuous”, “normal deviation once for pseudo-continuous”, “normal deviation twice for pseudo-continuous”, And “slip off”. All values of random 4 (0 to 99) are allocated to a plurality of numerical ranges in each of a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each variation pattern type. For example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of “Super Reach A” is selected, the variation belonging to the type such as “No Super-Sequence Super A Out” is selected according to the random 4 value extracted at a predetermined timing. A pattern is selected and determined.

  In the “variation pattern type” column, the type of “normal A” is the variation pattern type to which the variation pattern of “normal variation” belongs, and the variation pattern type in which special effects such as pseudo-continuous and slip are not performed. It is. The type of “normal B” is a variation pattern type to which a variation pattern of “normal variation” belongs, and is a variation pattern type in which special effects such as pseudo-continuous and sliding are performed. The type of “normal reach” is the variation pattern type to which the variation pattern of normal reach belongs. The type of “super reach A” is the variation pattern type to which the variation pattern of super reach A or special super reach A belongs. Super reach A and special super reach A belong to the same variation pattern type because the main effects in the reach state are substantially the same variation patterns. The type of “super reach B” is the variation pattern type to which the variation pattern of super reach B or special super reach B belongs. Super reach B and special super reach B belong to the same variation pattern type because the main effects in the reach state are substantially the same variation patterns.

  The ratio of “Super Reach A” and “Super Reach B” combined with “Super Reach A” is higher than the “Normal Reach”. Is set high. Therefore, when the super reach is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is higher than when the normal reach is displayed. In addition, among the types of “Super Reach A” and “Super Reach B”, the type of “Super Reach B” is selected as a big hit compared to the type of “Super Reach A”. It is set high. Therefore, when the super reach B is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is higher than when the super reach A is displayed.

  In each of the normal state 9R long-term big hit determination table and the short-time state 9R long-term big hit determination table shown in FIG. 17, the fluctuation patterns resulting in reach such as “normal reach”, “super reach A”, and “super reach B”. Although the type is provided, unlike the other tables shown in FIGS. 15, 16, 18, and 19, there is no change pattern type that does not reach “normal change”. The reason why the variation pattern type of “normal variation” is not provided is that in the present embodiment, when the 9R long-term big hit is reached, the reach state is always made during the variation display.

  The normal state 9R short-term big hit judgment table and the short-time 9R short-term big hit judgment table shown in FIG. 18 are different from the normal state 9R long-term big hit judgment table and the short-time 9R long-term big hit judgment table shown in FIG. In addition to the variation pattern types such as “normal reach”, “super reach A”, and “super reach B”, there are variation pattern types that do not reach such as “normal A” and “normal B”. Is provided. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern types “normal A” and “normal B” are provided in the present embodiment, when there is a sudden big hit or a small hit, when the reach state is displayed during the fluctuation display, This is because there are cases where it is not possible.

  15 to 19, a normal state deviation first determination table, a normal state deviation second determination table, a normal state 9R long-term big hit first decision table, a normal state 9R short-term big hit decision table, and Each of the normal state small hit determination tables is used to determine a variation pattern in a normal state that is not a time-short state. On the other hand, when determining the variation pattern in the time-short state, the first determination table in the time-short state shift is used instead of the first determination table in the normal-state shift. Further, when determining the variation pattern in the time-short state, the second determination table in the time-short state shift is used instead of the second determination table in the normal-state shift. Further, when determining the variation pattern in the short-time state, the short-time state 9R long-term big hit determination table is used instead of the normal state 9R long-term big hit first determination table. Further, when determining the variation pattern in the short-time state, the short-time state 9R short-term big hit judgment table is used instead of the normal state 9R short-term big hit judgment table. Further, when determining the variation pattern in the short-time state, the short-time state small hitting time determination table is used instead of the normal state small hitting time determination table.

  The relationship between the table used for the normal state shown in FIGS. 15 to 19 and the table used for the time reduction state is as follows. For example, as the variation patterns belonging to each variation pattern type of the first determination table at the time-shortage state deviation in FIG. 15B, the variations belonging to each variation pattern type of the first determination table at the time of deviation from the normal state in FIG. Compared to the pattern, a variation pattern that performs a substantially similar effect is set with a short variation time. For example, the “no super-continuous super A outage time short” in FIG. 15B is a fluctuation that performs substantially the same effect in a shorter time than the “no pseudo continuous super A out of time” in FIG. 15A. It is a pattern. Information of “short time” is specified for a variation pattern that performs substantially the same effect in such a short variation time. The relationship between the table used in the normal state and the table used in the time reduction state is the same between the table used in the other normal state and the table used in the time reduction state shown in FIGS. As a result, when the time is short, it is easy to select a variation pattern with a short variation time compared to the normal state. Therefore, in the short time state, the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation display is shorter than in the normal state, and the efficiency of digesting the stored data is improved. Regarding various “reach” variation displays, a variation pattern having the same variation time may be set in the case of variation display of the same pattern type in normal time and in short time.

  In addition, the tables used in the short time state shown in FIG. 15, FIG. 16, FIG. 18, and FIG. 19 are “normal A” and “normal B” combined with the tables used in the normal state in the correspondence relationship. The ratio at which the “normal” variation pattern type is selected is set high, and the “reach” variation pattern type including “normal reach”, “super reach A”, and “super reach B” is selected. Is set low. As a result, in the time-short state, it is easier to select a variation pattern with a short variation time than in the normal state. Therefore, in the short time state, the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation display is shorter than in the normal state, and the efficiency of digesting the stored data is further improved.

  The table used for the short-time state is set so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time can be easily selected only by providing the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern for the time-shortening with respect to the table used for the normal state having a correspondence relationship. May be. In addition, the table used for the short-time state is a ratio of selecting the “normal” variation pattern type in which “normal A” and “normal B” are combined, as described above, with respect to the table used for the normal state having a correspondence relationship. It is possible to select a variation pattern with the same variation time, such as setting a high value, but it is easy to select a variation pattern with a short variation time by simply setting a high ratio for selecting a variation pattern with a short variation time. May be.

  Further, the table shown in FIG. 15 is selectively used according to the number of reserved memories when determining the variation pattern. Specifically, when the number of reserved memories at the time of determining the fluctuation pattern is 1 to 3, the first determination table at the time of deviation from the normal state of (a) is used, and when the number of reserved memories is 4 to 8, The second determination table at the time of deviation from the normal state of b) is used. Similarly, the table shown in FIG. 16 is selectively used according to the number of reserved memories when determining the variation pattern. Specifically, when the number of reserved memories when determining the variation pattern is 1 to 3, the first determination table at the time of shortage state in (a) is used, and when the number of reserved memories is 4 to 8, In the case of b), the second determination table is used when the short state is off.

  In the table of FIG. 15, (a) the normal state deviation first determination table, (b) the normal state deviation second determination table is “normal” in which “normal A” and “normal B” are combined. The percentage of selection of the fluctuation pattern type is set high, and the percentage of selection of the fluctuation pattern type of “reach” including “normal reach”, “super reach A”, and “super reach B” is low. Is set. Such a relationship is the same between the first determination table at the time short-time state deviation (a) and the second determination table at the time short-time state deviation (b) in the table of FIG. As a result, when the number of reserved memories is relatively large such as 4 to 8, a variation pattern having a short variation time is easily selected compared to when the number of reserved memories is relatively small such as 1 to 3. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories is large, the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation display is shorter than when the number of reserved memories is small, and the efficiency of digesting the stored data is improved.

  The variation pattern type is determined as the variation pattern type in the variation display when the variation pattern type is determined by the pre-reading determination at the time of starting winning and at the time of starting the variation display based on the stored data of the starting winning after the starting winning. Sometimes, the number of reserved memories has changed. As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, when it is out of place, it is determined as a specific variation pattern type subject to the pre-reading notice regardless of whether it is a short-time state and the number of reserved storages. A common determination value is set as a determination value for selecting the variation pattern type of Super Reach B. This is determined by the pre-reading determination at the time of starting winning for the variation pattern type (super reach B) subject to the pre-reading notice regardless of whether the state is a short time state and the number of stored storages. This is to make the variation pattern type coincide with the variation pattern type determined as the variation pattern type in the variation display at the start of variation display based on the stored data of the start prize after the start winning. Therefore, if it is determined that the situation is out of date, the variation pattern type that is the target of the prefetching notice determined by the prefetching determination regardless of whether or not the time is short and the number of reserved storages. (Super Reach B) is determined as the variation pattern type in the variation display at the start of variation display based on the variation pattern type determined by the pre-reading determination at the time of the start winning, and after the start winning, based on the stored storage data of the starting prize The changed variation pattern type always matches. As a result, for the variation pattern type subject to the pre-reading notice, the pre-reading judgment can be accurately performed by assigning a common judgment value regardless of whether it is in the short-time state and the number of reserved memories. Can be done. On the other hand, for the variation pattern types such as normal reach that are not subject to the pre-reading notice, different judgment values are assigned depending on the number of stored stored information. Since it becomes possible to select, it is possible to improve the execution efficiency of the variable display, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  15 and FIG. 18, the table used at the time of big hit as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 relates to the variation pattern type of “reach”, “super reach A”, and The ratio of the variation pattern type of “super reach” combined with “super reach B” is set higher than the variation pattern type of “normal reach”. Therefore, when the “super reach” effect is performed, the reliability of the big hit is higher than when the “normal reach” effect is performed, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit.

  Also, in the tables used at the time of the big hit shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, regarding the variation pattern type of “super reach”, the variation pattern type of “super reach B” is selected more than the variation pattern type of “super reach A”. The rate of being set is high. Therefore, when the “Super Reach B” production is performed, the reliability of the big hit is higher than when the “Super Reach A” production is performed, and the player's sense of expectation for the big hit is increased. Can do.

  The variation pattern set in the big hit determination table shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 differs from the variation pattern set in the loss determination table of FIGS. 15 and 16 in the following points.

  In each of the determination table for 9R long-term big hit shown in FIG. 17 and the determination table for 9R short-term big hit shown in FIG. 18, the variation pattern type of “normal reach” includes three pseudo-continuous “normal” three times. A variation pattern is included. Therefore, when normal reach is reached in the pseudo-ream, when the number of re-variations in the pseudo-ream is a predetermined number such as 3, the ratio of big hits is higher (for example, 100%) than when it is less than the predetermined number. Thereby, as the number of re-variations increases in normal reach, the player's sense of expectation for jackpot can be enhanced.

  In each of the determination table for 9R long-term big hit shown in FIG. 17 and the determination table for 9R short-term big hit shown in FIG. 18, each of the variation patterns of “Super Reach A” and “Super Reach B” has four pseudo-reams. Fluctuation pattern is included (the maximum number of pseudo-continuous times when there is a loss is 3). Therefore, when the re-variation of the quasi-continuous is executed four times in the variation display, it is always a big hit. As a result, it is possible to set so that the larger the number of re-variations in the quasi-continuous, the more likely it will be a big hit. As a result, as the number of re-variations increases in super reach, the player's sense of expectation for jackpot can be increased.

  Further, in the variation pattern used at the time of big hit as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the variation pattern used as a pseudo-continuous is selected as compared with the variation pattern used at the time of loss as shown in FIGS. The variation pattern determination value is assigned so as to be higher. Also, in the variation pattern used at the time of big hit as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the variation pattern judgment value is assigned so that the greater the number of re-variations, the higher the selected ratio is. Yes. On the other hand, in the variation pattern used at the time of deviation as shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the variation pattern judgment value is assigned so that the smaller the number of re-variations, the higher the selected ratio. Yes. This increases the player's expectation for the big hit when the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-ream is executed, and further increases the player's expectation for the big hit as the number of re-variations in the pseudo-ream increases. Can be increased.

  In addition, as a table used at the time of 9R long-term big hit shown in FIG. 17, a data table used at the time of probability big hit and a data table used at the time of normal big hit may be provided, and may be used properly based on whether or not the probability big change state. . Specifically, at the probability variation big hit, the selection ratio of the variation pattern is set to be different between the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit, for example, the ratio of selecting a specific super reach is higher than the normal big hit.

  In addition, as a table used at the time of 9R short-term big hit shown in FIG. 18, a data table used at the time of first hit big hit and a data table used at the time of second hit big hit are provided, and either the first hit big hit or the second hit big hit You may make it use properly based on whether there is. Specifically, the variation pattern is selected at the time of the first and most likely hits, such as by increasing the ratio at which a specific super reach is selected at the time of the second and most likely hits. Set the ratio to be different.

  15 and FIG. 16, the threshold of the number of reserved memories when the ratio of determining the variation pattern type is varied according to the number of reserved memories (for example, the table is made different when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. The predetermined value at the time (for example, a value such as the reserved storage number “4” which is a threshold value for selecting a table in FIGS. 15 and 16) may be varied depending on the gaming state. For example, with respect to a table that lowers the ratio of determining a variation pattern type with a long variation time when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the number of reserved memories that is less than the non-probable variation state is the threshold value in the probability variation state. You may set as follows.

  Further, as the tables used when changing the rate of determining the variation pattern type in accordance with the number of reserved storages as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, “1”, “2”, “3”,. A table is provided for each one of the number of reserved memories, and these tables have different ratios for determining the variation pattern type according to the number of reserved memories (for example, a variation pattern type having a longer variation time as the number of reserved memories increases). It is also possible to use a table in which data is set so that the ratio of determination becomes low. Specifically, the data may be set so that the number of determination values for determining the variation pattern type varies depending on the number of reserved storage.

  In this embodiment, as the prefetch determination process, a determination value group for specifying the type of super reach B determined to perform the prefetch notice is provided for the variation pattern type, and any one of these determination values is read. An example is shown in which when the random number 3 matches, it is decided to make a prefetch notice. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and within the random number 3 numerical range, the selection range of each variation pattern type is specified by dividing each variation pattern type with a threshold, and the read random 3 number is in the variation pattern type numerical range. The variation pattern type as a result of the prefetch determination may be determined depending on whether it belongs. For example, in the case of a loss, the range of numerical data of each variation pattern type when the number of reserved storages is 1 to 3, and the range of numerical data of each variation pattern type when the number of stored storages is 4 to 8. Is a common range (e.g., a range of 105 to 109 of Super Reach B in FIG. 15) as in Super Reach B, and "Super Reach A", "Normal Reach", "Normal A, B" Thus, a part of the common range (for example, in FIG. 15, the range of 100 to 104 for super reach A, the range of 80 to 96 for normal reach, the range of 60 to 69 for normal B, and the range of 0 to 49 for normal A Range). Accordingly, as the prefetch determination result, for example, “super reach B”, “super reach A”, “super reach A or normal reach”, “normal reach”, “normal reach or normal B”, “normal B”, “normal A or As in “normal B” and “normal A”, it is possible to obtain a determination result that is only one variation pattern type and a determination result that is one of the two variation pattern types. In such a case, a command corresponding to each of these determination results may be transmitted as a start winning designation command.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 20, a command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of an effect symbol that is displayed variably on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol. (Corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns that can be used shown in FIGS. 15 to 19, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the production control device 100 controls the first design symbol display 9a or the second design design display 9b so as to start the design design variation display. In step 9, control is performed so as to start the variation display of the effect symbols.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) indicate whether or not to make a hit, and an effect control command indicating a hit type (disconnected, normal big hit, probability variation big hit, first sudden hit big hit, second sudden hit big hit, small hit) It is. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the decorative design and the production design in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are designated as the display results. It is called a command.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20, a variation pattern command and a display result designation command are displayed as a variation display (variation) of a decorative symbol corresponding to a variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and a second special symbol display. An effect display device 9 that can be used in common with the variation display (variation) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in 8b, and that produces an effect in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect parts, it is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command is transmitted after the variation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display. Note that information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variable pattern command. Further, each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be transmitted before the variation pattern command is transmitted.

  Note that the command 8D01 (H) (first symbol variation designation command) and the command 8D02 (H) (second symbol variation designation command) are executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 by the first special symbol display 8a. Whether the first decorative symbol display 9a that performs variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (designating) symbol during the variable symbol display time is subjected to the decorative symbol variation or by the second special symbol display 8b. It is used to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is to be changed in the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that performs the variable display of the second decorative symbol during the variation display time of the second special symbol.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol determination designation command) indicating that the display (change) of the effect symbol (and decoration symbol) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variation display (variation) of the effect symbol and the decorative symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are for displaying a fanfare screen, that is, an effect control command for designating the start of a jackpot game or the start of a jackpot game (a jackpot start designation command or a jackpot start designation command: a fanfare designation command). is there. The jackpot start designation command or the jackpot start designation command includes a jackpot start 1 designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot or the jackpot (usually indicating that the fanfare screen is displayed), a jackpot start designation 2 designation command (probable big hit And a small hit / probability start designation command (specify that a common fanfare screen is displayed for the small hit, first critical hit, and second critical hit). Since the commands are divided in this way, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled in the same or similar opening pattern as the first and second largest likelihood hits, which are the 9R short-term big hits, and the 9R short-term big hit. A common fanfare screen can be displayed for the small hits, and control can be performed so that the player can expect which type of small hits, the first hit probability hits, and the second hit probability hits. . In addition, when each of the small hit, the first critical hit, and the second critical hit is based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern command is received, from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the opening of the big prize opening (the final round) A series of effects up to (time) may be executed. When performing such an effect, the effect is not changed by a command other than the variation pattern command (for example, a command for displaying the fanfare screen and a command for specifying the end of the big hit game). .

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game and an effect control command (special jackpot end 1 designation command: ending) that specifies that the jackpot game is a non-probable big hit (usually a big hit) 1 designation command). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a probable big hit (big hit end 2 designation command: ending 2 designation command). is there. Command A303 (H) designates that a small hit / surprise end screen, which is a common end screen for the small hit, the first critical hit, and the second critical hit, that is, the end of the game for the first critical hit is designated. At the same time, it is an effect control command for specifying that it was the first hit probability big hit (rush 1 end specifying command: ending 3 specifying command). Command A304 (H) displays a small hit / surprise end screen, that is, designates the end of the game at the second maximum likelihood hit and designates that the second hit at the maximum hit is an effect control command (end of the accuracy 2 end) Designation command: ending 4 designation command). Command A 305 (H) displays a small hit / surprise end screen, that is, specifies the end of the small hit game, and also specifies an effect control command (small hit end specifying command: ending 5) Specified command).

  The command C0XX (H) designates that the first start winning is given by “C0” which is the upper byte (MODE), and designates the prefetch determination result as described above by “XX” which is the lower byte (EXT). Is an effect control command (first start winning designation command). The command C1XX (H) is an effect control command that designates that the second start winning is given by “C1” that is the upper byte (MODE) and designates the prefetch determination result by “XX” that is the lower byte (EXT). (Second start winning designation command). The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  Specifically, for each of the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command, for example, “loss, normal A”, “small hit, normal A”, “first” by the lower byte “XX”. Hit detection results and jackpot type determination results, such as “1st hit big hit, normal A”, “2nd hit big hit, normal A”, “normal big hit, normal reach”, “probability big hit, super reach B”, and variation pattern type The prefetch determination result specified by is designated. More specifically, as a result of the pre-reading determination, the hits such as “displacement”, “small hit”, “first sudden hit big hit”, “second hit positive hit”, “normal big hit”, and “probable big hit” are lost. And the variation pattern types such as “normal A”, “normal B”, “normal reach”, “super reach A”, and “super reach B” specified by the variation pattern type determination result. A unique number is assigned to each of all combinations with the indicated data, and the prefetch determination result is designated by the number. Therefore, as the start winning designation command, for each of the first start winning designation command and the second start winning designation command, a command in which a prefetch determination result is designated is provided. It is selected. The variation pattern types other than the super reach B, such as “normal A”, “normal B”, “normal reach”, and “super reach A”, are, for example, when the pre-reading determination is performed and when the variation display is started. Therefore, the prefetch determination is performed using only a portion where the determination values set for each of the first determination table and the second determination table overlap each other. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a pre-reading notice as a notice that is performed from the stage before the start of variable display by the starting prize may be executed based on the starting prize designation command. Note that each of the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command includes a command for designating that the first start prize or the second start prize has been received, and the first start prize or the second start prize. It is possible to specify that there has been a first start prize or a second start prize and a prefetch judgment result by using two commands, a command for designating a prefetch judgment result for each.

  Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (pending storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that 1 is added to the total pending storage number. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the pending memory count subtraction designation command, and adds the total pending memory count. May be specified by transmitting a command for specifying the total pending storage number for specifying the total pending storage number after subtraction.

  The presentation control command described above has a 2-byte structure, and the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  Further, when the production control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the production control CPU 101) receives the production control command described above from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31, it is shown in FIG. Depending on the contents, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 when performing a hold storage display based on a valid start winning. When the pre-reading described above is performed at the time of starting winning, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a starting winning designation command corresponding to the pre-reading determination result.

  As the lower byte of the start winning designation command, for example, it is determined when pre-reading for the start winning is not performed when pre-reading prohibition is set, for example, when it is determined that pre-fetching is already a big hit. “00” is set to specify “none”, and “01” is set when the pre-read determination result is out of place and it is determined that the variation type is normal A. Further, for example, “05” is set when the pre-read determination result is out of place and it is determined that the fluctuation type is Super Reach B. Further, “08” is set when it is determined that the prefetch determination result is a normal big hit and the variation type of super reach B. Similarly, with respect to the other prefetch determination results, data predetermined so that one prefetch determination result is specified is set as the lower byte of the start winning designation command.

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, based on the start winning designation command, a process for holding and displaying the hold, a process for determining whether or not to execute a prefetching notice, a process for selecting a prefetching notice type, and the like To do. The pre-reading notice refers to an effect in which information related to the pre-reading determination result is notified from the stage before the start of variable display due to the start winning.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 changes and displays a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol every time the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b starts to display the variation of the special symbol. A result designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls to start the decorative symbol variation display based on the variation pattern command and the display result designation command, and controls the effect display device 9 to start variation display of the effect symbol. .

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the production control microcomputer 100. In FIG. 21, as an example, SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol, various effects SR2 for determination, SR3 for determination of temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, SR4-1 for determination of first temporary stop symbol for pseudo continuous time, SR4-2 for determination of second temporary stop symbol for pseudo continuous time, third for pseudo continuous time SR4-3 for determining the temporary stop symbol, SR4-4 for determining the fourth temporary stop symbol for pseudo-continuous time, SR5 for determining the symbol stop order, SR6 for determining the type of the first notice effect, and notice of the first notice effect SR7 for determining the pattern, SR8 for determining the type of the second warning effect, SR9 for determining the specific pattern of the second warning effect, SR10 for determining the warning pattern of the second warning effect, and SR11 for determining the latent mode. ing.

  SR1-1, SR1-2, and SR1-3 are used for randomly determining the left, middle, and right stop symbols (final stop symbols excluding temporary stop symbols) of the effect symbols. SR2 is used for randomly determining various contents of effects such as effects produced by an image displayed on the effect display device 9. SR3 is used to randomly determine a temporary stop symbol when the slip effect as described above is performed. Each of the SR4-1 for determining the first temporary stop symbol for pseudo-continuous time and the SR4-4 for determining the fourth temporary stop symbol for pseudo-continuous time are the first times when the effect of the pseudo-continuous time as described above is performed. It is used to determine a temporary stop symbol at the time of temporary stop to a temporary stop symbol at the time of the fourth temporary stop.

  The random number SR5 is a random counter for selecting and determining the stop order of the left, middle, and right effect symbols from a plurality of order patterns.

  The random number SR6 is a random counter for generating a random number for determining the type of the first notice effect performed as a pre-read notice. Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for the jackpot notice effect, a plurality of notice types to which a plurality of notice patterns belong are provided, and when selecting the notice pattern of the notice effect, the notice type is selected and the selected notice type is selected. By selecting one notice pattern from a plurality of notice patterns belonging to, the notice pattern used for performing the notice effect is determined. The random number SR7 is a random counter for generating a random number for determining the notice pattern of the first notice effect.

  The random number SR8 is a random counter for generating a random number for determining the type of the second notice effect to be performed as a notice this time. The random number SR9 is for generating a random number used for determining whether or not to execute a specific effect type (specific step-up effect) in a predetermined notice effect (step-up notice described later) in the second notice effect. It is a random counter. The random number SR10 is a random counter for generating a random number for determining the notice pattern of the second notice effect.

  The random number SR11 is a random counter for generating a random number used when selecting the above-described latent mode from a plurality of latent modes.

  Each of such random numbers SR1-1 to SR11 is generated by counting of a random counter that updates a count value by software, and is cyclically updated within the range associated in FIG. By being extracted at a given timing, it is used as a random number.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process (S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed.

  In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on, that is, the first start winning is generated. It is determined whether or not (S311). If the first start winning is generated, the first start port switch passing process is executed (S312). Then, regardless of whether or not the first start port switch 13a is turned on, the CPU 56 turns on the second start port switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the second start winning port 14. It is determined whether there is a second start winning or not (S313). If the second start winning has occurred, the second start port switch passing process is executed (S314). Then, any one of S300 to S310 is performed.

The processes of S300 to S310 are as follows.
Special symbol normal processing (S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 enters a state where the special symbol variation display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of stored numerical data (total number of reserved memories) stored in the reserved memory buffer. The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variation display time: the time from the start of the variation display until the display result is derived and displayed (stopped display)) is the variation time of the variation display of the special symbol Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S302 (2 in this example).

  Display result designation command transmission process (S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S303 (3 in this example).

  Special symbol changing process (S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to S304. Update to the corresponding value (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (S304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stopped symbol is derived and displayed. Further, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. When the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 or 8 in this example) corresponding to S305 or S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbol and the decorative symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. When the big hit flag is set, the probability variation flag is set to the reset state regardless of whether or not the current state is the probability variation state. In addition, when the big hit flag is set, the hourly flag is set to the reset state regardless of whether or not the present is the hourly state.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, the execution time of the in-round processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to S306. The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. When the big hit flag and the probability variation flag are set, the probability variation flag may be reset in the pre-opening process for the big prize opening instead of the special symbol stop process described above. When the hour / hour flag is set, the hour / hour flag may be reset not in the special symbol stop process described above but in the pre-opening process for the big prize opening.

  Large winning opening open process (S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to S305. When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (S307): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, a time for opening the special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S309 (9 in this example).

  Small hit release processing (S309): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Control for transmitting the effect control command in the small hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there is still the remaining number of open times, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S308 (8 in this example). When all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (S310): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of S312. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process of S314. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a winning effect process that is called and executed in each of the first start port switch passing process and the second start port switch passing process. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process that is called and executed in the winning effect process of FIG. 25 and the special symbol normal process of FIG. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage used in each of the first starting port switch passing process and the second starting port switch passing process.

  The contents of the first start port switch process and the second start port switch process will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first start port switch process of FIG. 23, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter is 4 (upper limit value) (S211). The first reserved memory number counter is a counter for counting the first reserved memory number indicating the number of first start prizes that have been won at the first start prize opening 13.

  If the value of the first reserved storage number counter is 4 in S211, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the first reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S212).

  As shown in FIG. 27, as the holding storage buffer, a first holding storage buffer for storing the first start winning data and a second holding storage buffer for storing the second starting winning data are provided. It has been. In the first reserved memory buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved memory number is secured. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. The start winning data stored in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer is referred to as reserved storage data. The start winning data stored in the first hold storage buffer is called first hold storage data, and the start winning data stored in the second hold storage buffer is called second hold storage data.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (S213). In the process of S213, random R (a big hit determination random number), random 2 that is a software random number, and random 3 (see FIG. 6) are stored in the storage area.

  Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the current state is the time reduction state based on whether or not the time reduction flag is set (S214). In the time-short state, in order not to pre-read the reserved storage data, a first start winning designation command that does not specify the pre-reading determination result is transmitted without executing the winning effect processing (S219), and the process proceeds to S218. On the other hand, when it is not in the time saving state, the CPU 56 changes the data of the special symbol process flag to data that can be in the big hit gaming state (data indicating the big prize pre-release process, the big prize opening opening process, or the big hit end process). Based on whether or not, it is confirmed whether or not the current state is a big hit gaming state (S215). Note that the pre-reading determination may not be performed for the first start winning when the small hit game state.

  In the big hit game state, in order not to pre-read the stored storage data, a first start winning designation command that does not specify the pre-reading determination result is transmitted without executing the winning effect processing (S219), and to S218. move on. As described above, the pre-reading determination is not performed for the first start winning when the big hit game state is in progress and when the short hit state after the big hit game state ends. When pre-determination is determined for the first reserved storage buffer when the time is controlled in a short time during the predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, the player's gambling feeling should not be excessively stimulated. Can do. Specifically, when the time-short state is controlled, the stored data by the second start winning is processed preferentially over the stored data by the first starting winning, so that, for example, the big hit based on the first start winning is the stock If the big hit based on the second start prize is executed with the game being done, the stage where the big hit game will proceed with the big hit being stocked will be performed, so excessively stimulate the player's gambling This is because there is a risk of it. Furthermore, since the prohibition of such a prefetch determination is performed when the time is controlled in a short time state, the player's excitement is not excessively stimulated without deteriorating the interest of the game. be able to. In addition, since the pre-reading determination for the first reserved holding storage buffer is prohibited during the big hit gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively stimulated. Furthermore, since the prohibition of such a pre-reading determination is performed when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the player's gambling will not be excessively stimulated without deteriorating the interest of the game. can do.

  It should be noted that when the prefetch determination is prohibited, for example, during the big hit gaming state and in the time saving state after the big hit gaming state ends, the start winning designation command indicating the prefetch determination result may not be transmitted.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the big hit gaming state, the CPU 56 calls and executes the winning effect processing shown in FIG. 25 as a subroutine program (S216). The contents of the winning effect production process will be described later. In the winning effect processing, the pre-reading determination as described above is performed.

  After execution of the winning effect process, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first start winning designation command specifying the prefetch determination result obtained by the winning effect process (S217), and proceeds to S218.

  In S218, the CPU 56 increments the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number, which is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, and ends the process.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 as in S217 and S219, the CPU 56 assigns an address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM 54) according to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in effect control command control processing (S29).

  Next, the contents of the second start port switch process will be described. In the second start port switch process of FIG. 24, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is 4 (upper limit value) (S221). The second reserved memory number counter is a counter for counting a second reserved memory number indicating the number of second start prizes that have been won at the second start prize opening 14.

  If the value of the second reserved storage number counter is 4 in S221, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the second reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S222).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer as shown in FIG. 27 (S223). ). In the process of S223, random R (a big hit determination random number) and random numbers 2 and 3 (see FIG. 6) that are software random numbers are stored in the storage area.

  Then, the CPU 56 calls and executes the winning effect processing shown in FIG. 25 as a subroutine program (S224). The contents of the winning effect production process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the winning effect processing, the pre-reading determination as described above is performed.

  After execution of the winning effect processing, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second start winning designation command specifying the prefetch determination result obtained by the winning effect processing (S225).

  Next, the CPU 56 increments the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number, which is the sum of the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number (S226), and ends the process.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 as in S225, the CPU 56 uses the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM 54) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. set. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in effect control command control processing (S29).

  Next, the contents of the winning effect processing in FIG. 25 will be described. In the effect process at the time of winning, the CPU 56 stores the latest reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer in S213 of the first start port switch passing process or S223 of the second start port switch passing process. Read (S230). Specifically, in S230, when the winning effect process is called and executed by the first start port switch passing process, the stored data in the first hold memory buffer is read, and the winning effect process is the second start port switch. When called and executed by the passing process, the stored data in the second reserved memory buffer is read. Then, the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 26 is called and executed as a subroutine program (S231).

  Here, the contents of the big hit determination process will be described with reference to FIG. In the big hit determination process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation state is in effect based on whether or not the probability variation flag is set (S341).

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game when it is determined to be the probability variation big hit or the sudden big hit (first hit big hit, second hit big hit), and the next big hit occurs Is reset at the start of the big hit game (even if the next big hit is a promising big hit, it is reset once before or at the start of the big hit game).

  When the probability variation state is in effect, the probability variation jackpot determination value as shown in FIG. 7 is compared with the random R read as the big hit determination random number and the small hit determination random number, and based on whether or not they match, It is determined whether or not a big hit, that is, a big hit is determined (S342). When the jackpot determination process is called and executed by the winning effect process of FIG. 25, the random R as the jackpot determination random number in the stored storage data read in S230 is used for the jackpot determination in S342. Also, when the big hit determination process is called and executed by the special symbol normal process of FIG. 28, the random R as the big hit determination random number is used for the big hit determination in S342 out of the stored storage data read in S55 described later. It is done. In the big hit determination, when the big hit determination value matches the random R, the determination of the big hit is made. Further, when not in the probability variation state, the non-probability variation big hit determination value as shown in FIG. 7 is compared with the random R read as the random number for hit determination as in the case of the big hit determination in S342, and whether or not they match. Based on this, a big hit determination is performed (S343).

  In the big hit determination at S342 or S343, when the big hit determination value matches the random R and the decision to make a big hit is made, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag (S344). Then, information on the type of the special symbol (one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) for which the jackpot determination has been made, and information on whether or not the probability variation state is being performed (information indicated by the probability variation flag) ) In accordance with the first special symbol low probability jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 7C as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types. The first special symbol high probability jackpot type determination table shown or the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 7E is selected (S345).

  Then, depending on the type of the special symbol (one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) for which the jackpot determination is made, the jackpot type determination value as shown in FIG. 7 and the random number for determining the jackpot type Random 2 read out as a type and a type corresponding to the value of random 2 read out as a random number for determining the type of big hit (“first sudden hit big hit”, “second sudden hit big hit”, “probable big hit” Or “normal jackpot”) is determined as the jackpot type (S346). When the big hit determination process is called and executed by the winning effect process of FIG. 25, random number 2 as a random number for determining the big hit type is used for the big hit type determination in S346 out of the stored storage data read in S230. Also, when the big hit determination process is called and executed by the special symbol normal process of FIG. 28, random number 2 as a random number for determining the big hit type out of the stored storage data read out in S55 described later is the big hit type in S346. Used for judgment. Further, the data indicating the determined jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S347), and the process ends. For example, in the big hit type buffer, when the big hit type is “ordinary big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, the data indicating the big hit type is “ When “02” is set and the big hit type is “first hit big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “second big hit big hit”, data indicating the big hit type Is set as “04”. The first and second start winning designation commands described above are commands in which the same value as the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the jackpot type buffer is set as data specifying the jackpot type stored in the lower byte (EXT). May be transmitted.

  On the other hand, in the big hit determination at S342 or S343, when the big hit determination value and the random R do not match and a determination is made that the big hit is not made, the CPU 56 determines the special symbol (the first special symbol and the first special symbol) Depending on the type of 2 special symbols), the small hit determination value as shown in FIG. 7 is compared with the random number for determining the big hit and the random R read as the random number for determining the small hit as described above. Then, based on whether or not they match, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit, that is, a small hit determination (S348). In the small hit determination, when the small hit determination value matches the random R, the determination as a small hit is made. When it is determined that the first special symbol big hit determination is not a big hit, the small hit determination is performed using the first special symbol small hit determination value, and the second special symbol big hit determination is determined not to be a big hit. Is performed, the small hit determination is performed using the small special determination value for the second special symbol.

  In the small hit determination in S348, when the small hit determination value matches the random R and the determination is made that the small hit is made, the CPU 56 sets the small hit flag (S349) and ends the processing.

  As described above, in the big hit determination process, the big hit determination, the big hit type determination, and the small hit determination can be performed. Such a big hit determination process is read and executed in the effect process at the time of winning, and, as will be described later, also in a special symbol normal process that performs a big hit determination, a big hit type determination, and a small hit determination at the start of fluctuation. Called and executed.

  The above-described step of S343 is executed before S341, and proceeds to S344 when the non-probability variable big hit determination value and the random R match, and when the non-probability variable big hit determination value and the random R do not match, S341 You may make it progress to. In this way, it is possible to reduce the number of process steps executed in the big hit determination process in the normal state (non-probability variation state).

  Next, the process executed in the winning effect process in FIG. 25 after the jackpot determination process in S231 is executed will be described. After the big hit determination process (S231) is executed, it is checked whether or not the big hit flag is set (S232). When the big hit flag is set, the variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the big hit type determined in the big hit determination processing of S231 is used according to the gaming state of the normal state or the short time state (the gaming state based on the short time flag) 17 and 18, the normal state 9R long-term big hit judgment table, the short-time state 9R long-term big hit judgment table, the normal state 9R short-term big hit judgment table, and the short-time state 9R short-term big hit judgment table. A variation pattern type determination table in any one of the determination tables is selected and set as a determination table for determining the variation pattern type (S233). Then, the big hit flag is reset (S234), the data indicating the big hit type stored in the big hit type buffer as described above is deleted, and the process proceeds to S241.

  When it is confirmed in S232 that the big hit flag is not set, it is checked whether or not the small hit flag is set (S236). When the small hit flag is set, the variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the small hit determined in the big hit determination process of S231 is set according to the gaming state of the normal state or the short time state (based on the short time flag) In order to determine the variation pattern type by selecting the variation pattern type determination table in any one of the normal state small hit determination table and the short time short hit determination table shown in FIG. Is set as the determination table (S237). Then, the small hit flag is reset (S238), and the process proceeds to S241.

  On the other hand, when it is confirmed in S236 that the small hit flag has not been set, it is a time when there is a loss, and the normal determination is shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. The fluctuation pattern type table in the specific determination table (for example, the first determination table at the time of detachment from the normal state) is selected from the first determination table at the time lapse state and the second determination table at the time lapse state. Is set as a determination table for determining the variation pattern type (S240), and the process proceeds to S241. As the table set in S240, any of the tables used at the time of the above-described deviation may be used. In the case of a loss, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the variation pattern type becomes the variation pattern type of Super Reach B in order to determine whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice. Since a common determination value is set for the pattern type, any table may be selected and used.

  Next, in S241, using the variation pattern type determination table set in any one of S233, S237, and S240, the determination value of the variation pattern type is compared with random 3 read as a random number for determining the variation pattern type. Then, a determination is made to select a variation pattern type corresponding to a value that matches the value of random 3 read as a random number for determining the variation pattern type as the variation pattern type to be executed (S241). When the display result is out of place, it is sufficient to determine whether or not at least the variation pattern type is the super reach B type in S241. Therefore, the super reach B type is not used without using the determination table as described above. Is determined in advance as program data, and it is determined whether or not the read random 3 is between the lower limit value and the upper limit value of the determination data for super reach B set as program data. It may be determined whether or not the variation pattern type is a super reach B type based on the processing. And about the start winning which occurred based on the information of the hit based on the big hit determination result by S342 and S343 and the small hit determination result by S348, the information of the big hit type by S346, and the information of the variation pattern type by S241, Select the first start prize or the second start prize and the start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) indicating the above-mentioned pre-reading determination result. Then, data for transmitting the command is set (S242), and the process ends. The start winning designation command may be a command that can specify information on the variation pattern type as long as it is a command that can specify the information on the loss of winning and the information on the type of jackpot when it is determined that it is a big hit. . Further, the processing of S242 is not provided in the winning effect processing, but is executed after the winning effect processing in each of the first start winning port switch passing process and the second starting winning port switch passing process. It may be provided. In this way, it is possible to recognize whether the generated start prize is the first start prize or the second start prize based on which passing process is executed. There is no need to determine whether the first start winning or the second starting winning is made.

  In the winning effect processing of FIG. 25 (including the jackpot determination processing of FIG. 26 executed at the time of starting winning), all determinations and data storage are performed when executed at the starting winning in order to make a pre-reading notice. May be performed on the register so that the data is not stored in the RAM. For example, the determination processing such as S342, S343, S345, S346, and S348 in FIG. 26 and S232, S237, S240, and S241 in FIG. 25 are determined using the threshold set in the control process, and S344 in FIG. , S347, S349, and S234, S225, S238, etc. of FIG. 25 are not stored in the RAM, and all are big hits or small hits based on arithmetic processing on the registers, And the process which determines the classification of a fluctuation pattern is performed. Then, based on the result of such determination processing, the start winning designation command data as set in S242 is set. By doing so, it is possible to transmit a start winning designation command without storing data for a flag such as a big hit flag or a small hit flag and storing big hit type data in the effect process at the time of winning a prize. Become.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer (see FIG. 27) (S52). If there is stored data in the second reserved memory buffer, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) Data indicating “second” is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

  In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a depends on whether the data indicating "first" or the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. And the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol display unit 8a performs the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. It is. On the other hand, when data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 9a is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer. Is done. Here, the “common processing routine” is a program for realizing a specific series of processes, and in this embodiment, a series for performing variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It points to the program for realizing the process. In this embodiment, the “common processing routine” includes the processing of S55 to S61 in the special symbol normal processing described later, the variation pattern setting processing of S301, the display result specifying command transmission processing of S302, and the special symbol variation of S303. The process and the special symbol stop process of S304 are included.

  If there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer by the control of S52 to S54, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol display 8b based on the second reserved memory data is It is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a based on the data in the first reserved memory.

  In this way, by executing the variable display of the second special symbol display 8b based on the data of the second reserved memory in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a based on the data of the first reserved memory. The following effects can be obtained. During the predetermined period after the end of the big hit game state of the normal big hit, the probable big hit, and the second hit big hit game state, the time-varying control is performed, so that the variable winning ball device 15 has a game ball in the second start winning opening 14. Makes it easier to win. Therefore, during the predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, the data in the second reserved memory is more likely to be generated than at other times. When the reserved storage data is stored in both the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer, the second reserved storage is more effective than the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a based on the first reserved storage data. Since the variation display of the second special symbol display 8b based on the data is preferentially executed, it is possible to efficiently process the stored storage data that is likely to occur in the short time state after the end of the big hit gaming state. The execution efficiency of the variable display of the second special symbol display 8b in the short time state after the end of the big hit gaming state can be improved.

  In the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Are stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and stores each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 stores the count value of the total pending storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (S57), and then decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (S58). Before subtracting 1 from the count value of the total pending storage number counter in S58, the CPU 56 determines the count value in S58 as data necessary for determining the variation pattern according to the total pending storage number in the variation pattern setting process. Is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 55. The counter value stored in this way is used to determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process. In the case of the present embodiment, the CPU 56 performs control to shorten the variable display time of the special symbol according to the total reserved memory number (for example, control to shorten the variable display time when the total reserved memory number becomes a predetermined number or more). .

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of S300-S310 can be made common by the case where the 1st special symbol is made object and the case where the 2nd special symbol is made object.

  Next, the CPU 56 calls and executes the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 26 described above (S59). Thereby, the big hit determination and the big hit type determination or the small hit determination are performed. In the big hit determination process, when it is determined that the big hit is made as described above, the big hit flag is set, and data indicating the big hit type is stored in the big hit type buffer. Further, as described above, when it is determined that a small hit is made, the small hit flag is set. The big hit determination process is a big hit determination or the like in a winning effect presentation process and a special symbol normal process performed in each of the first start port switch passing process and the second start port switch passing process which are executed at the time of starting winning a prize, etc. It is a common subroutine program that is commonly used in As described above, the jackpot determination and the like are performed using a common subroutine program, whereby the capacity of the program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  In addition, a common subroutine program is used in the winning effect production process and the special symbol normal process which are executed in each of the first start port switch passing process and the second start port switch passing process which are executed at the time of starting winning. You may make it perform the above jackpot determination etc. by a separate program, without using.

  As described above, regarding the second special symbol corresponding to the second start winning opening 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15, among the big hit types, “first big hit big hit” and “second big hit big hit” are set. It is set not to allocate. Thereby, about the start winning to the 2nd starting winning opening 14, it becomes easy to generate | occur | produce a 9R long-term jackpot, and it can improve the interest of a game.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (S60). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “2” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the decision result of the big hit type, one of “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, which becomes the big hit symbol, is determined as the special symbol stop symbol To do. That is, when the big hit type is determined as “first hit big hit”, “1” which is the first big hit big hit symbol is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit type is determined as “second big hit big hit”, “3” which is the second big hit big hit symbol is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit type is determined as “normal big hit”, “5”, which is the normal big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be “probable variation jackpot”, “7”, which is the probability variation jackpot symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S61).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S91).

  When the big hit flag is set, the variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the big hit type determined in the big hit determination process of S59 is set according to the gaming state of the normal state or the short time state (the gaming state based on the short time flag). 17 and 18, the normal state 9R long-term big hit judgment table, the short-time state 9R long-term big hit judgment table, the normal state 9R short-term big hit judgment table, and the short-time state 9R short-term big hit judgment table. The variation type table in any one of the determination tables is selected, set as a determination table for determining the variation type (S92), and the process proceeds to S96.

  When it is confirmed in S91 that the big hit flag is not set, it is checked whether or not the big hit flag is set (S93). When the small hit flag is set, the variation pattern type determination table corresponding to the small hit determined in the big hit determination process of S59 is set according to the gaming state of the normal state or the short time state (based on the short time flag) A determination table for determining a variation type by selecting a variation type table in one of the determination tables of the normal state small hit determination table shown in FIG. 19 and the short time short hit determination table shown in FIG. (S94), and the process proceeds to S96.

  On the other hand, when it is confirmed by S93 that the small hit flag is not set, it is a time of losing, and the total pending storage number is read from the total pending storage number counter as the current pending storage number (S94a). FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 show the current number of pending memories made up of the total number of pending memories read and the gaming state of the normal state or the short time state (determining the gaming state based on the short time flag). The variation type table is selected from the determination table of any one of the first determination table at the time of deviation from the normal state, the second determination table at the time of deviation from the normal state, the first determination table at the time reduction from the short time state, and the second determination table at the time reduction from the short state As a determination table for determining the variation type (S95), the process proceeds to S96. In S95, the variation type table may be selected using not only the total number of reserved memories, but the number of reserved memories for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Next, in S96, using the variation pattern type determination table set in any of S92, S94, and S95, the variation pattern type is selected and determined from random 3 read in S55 (S96). As described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, the variation pattern type (super reach B) subject to the pre-reading notice is common regardless of whether it is in the short-time state and the number of reserved storages. If it is determined that the display result will be out of order because the judgment value is assigned, it will be the time of the start prize regardless of whether the time is short and whether the number of reserved memories is The variation pattern type determined by the pre-reading determination always matches the variation pattern type determined as the variation pattern type in the variation display at the start of variation display based on the stored data of the start prize after the start winning. Become. Thereby, the prefetch determination can be accurately performed.

  Next, the CPU 56 selects a variation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 15 to 19) corresponding to the variation pattern type determined in S96 (S97). Then, the CPU 56 extracts random 4 which is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and determines the variation pattern based on the extracted random 4 using the table selected in S97 (S98).

  Next, an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set (S99). Thereby, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Further, the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command is set according to the special symbol for starting the variation display (S99a). Specifically, in S99a, a symbol variation designation command corresponding to the special symbol designated by the special symbol pointer is set. Thereby, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. The first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command is transmitted at the transmission timing after the variation pattern command is transmitted. As described above, the information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is included in the variable pattern command, so that S99a is not provided and the first symbol is displayed. The variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may not be transmitted.

  Then, the variation of the special symbol designated by the special symbol pointer is started (S100). Also, a start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (S101). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (S302) (S102).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 determines any one of the display control 1 designation to the display result 6 designation according to the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss information (see FIG. 20). Control to transmit.

  In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S110).

  If the jackpot flag is set, a display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in S347 described above (S111). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a normal jackpot, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command indicating a normal jackpot. When the big hit type is a probable big hit, when the big hit type for performing the process of transmitting the display result 3 designation command indicating the probable big hit is the first sudden probable hit, the display result 4 is designated to indicate that it is the first probable big hit. Process to send command. When the big hit type is the second hit probability big hit, a process of transmitting a display result 5 designation command indicating that the second hit big hit is performed. Thereby, a display result designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG.

  In S110, when the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S116, and it is confirmed whether or not the small hit flag is set. When the CPU 56 confirms that the small hit flag is set in the process of S116, it sets a display result 6 designation command (S117). When the small hit flag is not set, a display result 1 designation command is set (S118). As a result, the display result designation command for designating the set small hit or miss is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG.

  Then, a reserved memory number subtraction designation command for designating that the total reserved memory number is subtracted by 1 is transmitted (S119). Instead of transmitting the reserved storage number subtraction designation command, a combined pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted. Further, the CPU 56 stores the transmitted display result designation command in the effect symbol type storage area in the RAM 55.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (S303) (S120).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (S125). When the variable time timer times out (S126), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (S304). Update (S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b Control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (S131). If data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and “second” is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the production control microcomputer 100 (S132). Thereby, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

  When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag (S134), and sets a big hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type in the effect control microcomputer 100 (S135). Thereby, the big hit start designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a normal jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. When the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the type of big hit is the first hit probability big hit or the second hit probability big hit, a small hit / rush accuracy start designation command is transmitted. Whether or not the big hit type is a probable big hit or a sudden big hit is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 in S347 described above (data stored in the big hit type buffer).

  Next, the opening pattern data of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 stored for each jackpot type in the ROM 55 is selected and read according to the jackpot type, and stored in the opening pattern data storage area provided in the RAM 55. (S136). Specifically, in S136, the opening pattern data is read from the ROM 54 as follows. For each of the normal big hit and the probable big hit, the open pattern data for 9R long-term big hit is read. For the first sudden hit, a random value of 7 is read out, and the release pattern is selected and determined as described above using the first sudden hit big open pattern table of FIG. The open pattern data of B) is read from the ROM 54. With respect to the second sudden probability big hit, a random value of 7 is read out, and the release pattern is selected and determined as described above using the second sudden likelihood big hit release pattern table of FIG. The open pattern data of B) is read from the ROM 54.

  Next, in order to count the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, data on the number of rounds is set in the open number counter provided in the RAM 55 based on the open pattern data stored in the RAM 55 according to the big hit type. (S137A). The data of the number-of-opening counters set here indicates the number of rounds, but for the opening pattern of 9R long-term big hit and the opening pattern A, it matches the actual number of opening of the big prize opening, and for the opening pattern B, the actual large number The value is one less than the number of times the winning opening is opened (because the opening pattern B is opened twice in the ninth round).

  Also, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer which is a timer used for controlling the jackpot gaming state (S137B). Here, the big hit display time indicates that a big hit has occurred in the case of a normal big hit and a probable big hit, and that a big hit or a small hit has occurred in the case of a first sudden hit big hit and a second sudden hit big hit. Is a time for notification by a fanfare production or the like. Thereafter, in the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the big winning opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and a round is started.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winning opening opening process (S305) (S138), and the process is terminated.

  In S139, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set. If the time reduction flag is set, the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of possible changes of the special symbol in the time reduction state is decremented by 1 (S140). Then, it is checked whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (S141). If the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the time reduction flag is reset (S142). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit flag is set (S143). If the small hit flag is set, a small hit / rush start designation command is set in the production control microcomputer 100 (S144). As a result, the small hit / probability start designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG.

  Next, the opening pattern data of the opening pattern A used for the small hit is read from the ROM 54 and stored in the opening pattern data storage area provided in the RAM 55 (S145).

  Next, the number-of-rounds data is set in the number-of-opening counter based on the opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54 according to the small hit (S146A).

  Also, in the big winning opening control timer which is a timer used for controlling the big hit gaming state, in the small hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the sudden big hit or the small hit by the fanfare effect etc. in the effect display device 9). A corresponding value is set (S146B). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (S308) (S147), and the process is terminated. Thereafter, in the pre-opening process for small hits, the big prize opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big prize opening is opened and a round is started.

  If it is determined in S143 that the small hit flag is not set, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S148), and the process is terminated.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening in the special symbol process (S305). In the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big winning opening control timer by 1 (S401). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (S402). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process is terminated.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0, the CPU 56 designates the big prize opening opening designation command (A1XX) for designating the display state according to the number of rounds during the opening of the big prize opening (during round). (H)) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (S403). Note that the CPU 56 recognizes the number of rounds by checking the value of the number-of-releases counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game. Then, the CPU 56 drives the solenoid 21 to perform control for opening the special winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 20) (S404), and decrements the value of the opening number counter by -1 (S405). Thereby, the count value of the number of rounds is updated at the start of the open state in each round.

  Further, a value corresponding to the opening time of the corresponding round is set in the special winning opening control timer based on the opening pattern data stored in the RAM 55 (S406). Specifically, in S406, the current round is specified by the value of the number-of-releases counter, and the release time of the round is set based on the release pattern data stored in the RAM 55. Since the opening time is different between the 9R long-term big hit and the 9R short-term big hit as described above, the opening time set in S406 is different. When opening pattern B is selected, taking into account that the grand prize opening is opened twice during the round, only the ninth round, the opening time of the round ends from the start of the first opening Set to the time until. In the ninth round of the opening pattern B, there is an interval state (closing time) between the first opening state and the second opening state, which is common to the opening time control that is opened only once per round. In order to execute the pre-opening pre-opening process using the processing step, in S406, only in the case of the 9th round, the end of the round from the start of the round (at the start of the first opening) is set in the high-winning end control timer. Set the time until the hour (at the end of the second opening). Thus, the ninth round of the opening pattern B is controlled so that the round ends when the big prize opening control timer expires, as in other rounds where the big prize opening is opened only once. .

  In the case of this embodiment, when a big hit is made, an opening pattern is selected according to the type of the big hit, and the opening pattern data to be executed in the big winning is stored in the opening pattern data storage area of the RAM 55 in S136. For the release pattern B, in the release pattern data, in addition to the time data specifying the time from the start of the first release of the ninth round to the end of the second release, the end of the first release of the ninth round Time data specifying the time (first release end data) and time data specifying the start time of the second release of the ninth round (second release start data) are included. Thus, in the process for opening the special prize opening shown in FIG. 34, the end process of the first opening and the start process of the second opening are performed using these data. Further, as described above, for the opening pattern B, the first opening start process is performed in S404, and the second opening is performed using the large winning opening control timer in the large winning opening opening processing shown in FIG. When the end process is performed, the two big prize opening openings are realized during the round.

  In this embodiment, for the ninth round of the release pattern B, the data stored in the release pattern data storage area is directly used as the first release end data and the second release start data. However, at the time of execution of the ninth round of the opening pattern B, in the pre-opening process of the big winning opening, the first opening end data and the second opening start data are read from the opening pattern data storage area, Similarly to the data of the control timer, it may be set as data for performing the control of the ninth round. Also, using the data indicating the first opening time, the second opening time, and the interval time between the first opening and the second opening, the opening in the ninth round of the opening pattern B Control may be performed.

  Thus, in S406, every time a round is started, a maximum round duration (maximum opening time) is set based on the opening pattern data. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening process (S306) (S407).

  FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening process (S306) in the special symbol process. In the special prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the special prize opening control timer by 1 (S420).

  Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer has become 0 (S421). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0, it is confirmed whether or not the release pattern B is selected in the release pattern data storage area (S422).

  When the opening pattern B is not selected, the process proceeds to S432 described later. On the other hand, when the opening pattern B is selected, the value of the big prize opening control timer is the first of the ninth round specified based on the data at the time of the first opening end stored in the opening pattern data storage area. It is confirmed whether or not the value is equivalent to the end of opening (S423).

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is the value at the end of the first round of the ninth round in S423, control is performed to drive the solenoid 21 to close the big prize opening (S424), and to S432 move on. As a result, in the ninth round of the opening pattern B, the first opening state is ended and the closing state is reached, and the interval time before the second opening state is started. On the other hand, when the value of the big prize opening control timer is not the value at the end of the first opening of the ninth round in S423 (including both before and after the end of the first opening of the ninth round). Check whether the value of the big prize opening control timer is a value corresponding to the second opening start time of the ninth round specified based on the second opening end data stored in the opening pattern data storage area (S425).

  When the value of the big winning opening control timer is the value at the start of the second round opening in the ninth round in S425, the solenoid 21 is driven to control the opening of the big winning opening (S426), and the process goes to S432. move on. As a result, in the ninth round of the opening pattern B, the opening state is started twice. The end of the second open state is ended in S435, which will be described later, when the round time set in S406 has elapsed, as in the open patterns other than the open pattern B. On the other hand, when the value of the big prize opening control timer is not the value at the start of the second opening of the ninth round in S425 (including both before and after the second opening of the ninth round). The process proceeds to S432.

  In S432, it is confirmed whether the count switch 23 is turned on (S432). If the count switch 23 is not turned on, the process is terminated. When the count switch 23 is turned on, the value of the winning number counter for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening is incremented by one (S433). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined value (for example, 10) (S434). If the value of the winning number counter is not a predetermined value, the process is terminated. Note that the determination order of S421 and S432 may be reversed.

  When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 by S421, or when the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined value by S434, the CPU 56 drives the solenoid 21 to close the big prize opening. Control is performed (S435). Thereby, the open state of the special winning opening in the selected open pattern is completed. In S435, in the case of the opening pattern A in which the special winning opening is opened once during the round, the one opening is ended. In S435, in the case of the opening pattern B in which the big prize opening is opened twice during the round, the second opening is ended. The value of the winning number counter is cleared (set to 0) (S436).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the opening number counter is 0 (S438). Specifically, in S438, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds to be executed remains. When the value of the opening number counter is not 0, it is necessary to continue the big hit gaming state, so the CPU 56 designates a display state corresponding to the number of rounds after the big winning opening is opened (after the end of the round). Control is performed to transmit the designation command (A2XX (H)) after opening the big prize opening to the production control microcomputer 100 (S439). Then, based on the data specifying the interval time in the open pattern data stored in the RAM 55, the winning prize control timer corresponds to the time (interval period) from the end of the round to the start of the next round. A value to be set is set (S440), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (S305) (S441).

  When the value of the number-of-opens counter is 0 in S438, the CPU 56 transmits a jackpot end 2 designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 when the jackpot type data is data indicating a probable variation jackpot. (S442, S447). Whether or not it is a probable big hit in S442 is, specifically, whether or not the data indicating the big hit type set in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 in S74 is a value ("02" in this example) indicating the probable big hit. It can be determined by checking whether or not. Then, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (for example, the time at which the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot game has ended) to the jackpot control timer (S449), and the value of the special symbol process flag Is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S307) (S450).

  When the data indicating the big hit type is not the data indicating the probability variation big hit but the data indicating the first big hit big hit, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the sudden hit 1 end designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S443). , S444). Whether or not it is the first big hit big hit in S443, specifically, the data indicating the big hit type set in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 in S74 is a value (in this example, “03”). This can be determined by checking whether or not.

  In S443, when the data indicating the big hit type is not the data showing the first big hit, but the data showing the second big hit, the control for transmitting the hit 2 end designation command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control is performed ( S444A, S444B). Whether or not it is the second big hit big hit in S444, specifically, the data showing the big hit type set in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 in S74 is a value (in this example, “04”). This can be determined by checking whether or not.

  In S444A, when the data indicating the big hit type is not the data indicating the second big hit big hit, the data indicating the big hit type is the data indicating the normal big hit (in this example, “01”). Control is performed to transmit the jackpot end 1 designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (S445). Then, the process proceeds to S449.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the big prize opening control timer (S154). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer is 0 (S155). If the big prize opening control timer is not 0, the process is terminated. If the big prize opening control timer is 0, it is checked whether the type of big hit is a probability variation big hit, a first sudden hit big hit, or a second sudden hit big hit (S156).

  If the big hit type is a probability change big hit, a first hit probability big hit, or a second hit probability big hit, a probability change flag is set (S157), and the gaming state is shifted to the probability change state. Then, the process proceeds to S158. On the other hand, if the type of big hit is not the probability variation big hit, the first sudden hit big hit, or the second sudden hit big hit, the process proceeds to S158 as it is.

  In S158, it is confirmed whether or not the type of jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, a normal jackpot or a second sudden hit jackpot (S158). If the big hit type is a probable big hit, a normal big hit, or the second sudden hit big hit, the time reduction flag is set (S159), and for example, 100 is set in the time reduction counter (S160), the time reduction state To migrate. Since the time reduction counter indicates the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state, when the time is set to 100, the time reduction state continues until a maximum of 100 changes are displayed thereafter. Further, when the next big hit occurs before the variable display is performed 100 times, the time reduction state is terminated at that time. Then, the process proceeds to S161. On the other hand, if the type of big hit is not the probability big hit, the normal big hit or the second sudden big hit, the process proceeds to S161 as it is. In S161, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S161).

  Although the timers and flags to be handled are different, the small hit pre-release process in S308 is the same as the pre-big hit release process in S305, and the small hit open process in S309 is the same process as the mid-round process in S306. The small hit end process in S310 is the same process as the big hit end process in S307. However, unlike the case of the big hit end process, the probability change flag and the hourly flag are not set in the small hit end process. Therefore, at the small hit, the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are not set / reset.

  Next, the normal symbol process (S27) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (CPU 56) will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol process, when detecting that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (S911), the CPU 56 executes a gate switch passage process (S912). Then, the CPU 56 executes any one of the processes shown in S900 to S903 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  Gate switch passage processing (S912): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter has reached the maximum value ("4" in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. Note that the LED of the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (random 5) and storing it in a storage area (ordinary symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of passages through the gate.

  Normal symbol normal processing (S900): The CPU 56 can start normal symbol fluctuation (for example, the normal symbol indicator 10 does not display the normal symbol variation display and hits the normal symbol indicator 10). When the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not in the open / close operation based on the symbol being derived and displayed), the value of the gate passing memory number is confirmed. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the number of stored gate passes is not 0, whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol) is determined based on the random 5 extracted value for normal symbol per determination. In the normal symbol normal process, when the special game state is the short time state, a setting is made to increase the determination value for determining that the normal symbol is hit, compared to the normal game state other than the short time state. Thereby, in the time-short state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased. Further, in the normal symbol normal process, the normal symbol variation time is set to be shorter in the time-short state than in the normal game state other than the time-short state. Thereby, in the time-short state, the fluctuation time in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. Then, the normal symbol variation time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (S901).

  Normal symbol variation processing (S901): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, stops the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10, and causes the normal symbol process timer to detect the normal symbol process timer. Set the stop symbol display time and start the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (S902).

  Normal symbol stop process (S902): The CPU 56 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, it checks whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (S900). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory operating time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Also, it is confirmed whether or not the current game state is a special game state such as a short-time state. If the current game state is a special game state, the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) is released in the special game state. If the pattern (2 seconds × 2 times open) is selected and the normal game state other than the special game state is selected, the release pattern (1 second × 1) of the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) in the normal game state Open once) and set the selected release pattern. Specifically, in the special gaming state, an opening pattern is set in which the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is longer and the number of times of opening is larger than in the normal gaming state. Thereby, in the special game state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased (increased) compared to the normal game state than when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is not in the short-time state. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (S903).

  Ordinary electric accessory actuating process (S903): The CPU 56 is based on the condition that the normal symbol process timer has not timed out, and the number of game balls won in the ordinary electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) (second starting prize) The number of winnings to the mouth 14) is counted, and the ordinary electric winnings are counted with the set opening pattern (the opening / closing operation of the variable winning ball device 15 is performed). The normal electric accessory release pattern process is executed. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (S900). Further, in the ordinary electric accessory winning count process, when the counted number of winnings reaches a predetermined upper limit number such as 8, for example, even if the ordinary symbol process timer times out, the ordinary electric accessory The operation process is ended, and the open state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is ended.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 100 as effect control means will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101). The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S701). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703), and executes the effect control process of S704 to S710.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a command analysis process for setting a flag according to the received effect control command (S704). Next, on the basis of the received effect control command, a hold storage process for storing information that can specify the contents of the hold storage data and the order of use in the hold specific area (effect side hold specific area) of the RAM is performed (S705). . Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display unit 18c (S706). Further, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S707). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a first decorative symbol display control process is performed (S708). In the first decorative symbol display control process, display control of the first decorative symbol display 9a is executed. Further, a second decorative symbol display control process is performed (S709). In the second decorative symbol display control process, display control of the second decorative symbol display 9b is executed. Furthermore, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter (random counter) for generating a random number used for determining the aspect of the effect or the like is executed (S710). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S702. As in the special symbol process executed by the game control microcomputer 560, the first ornament symbol display control process and the second ornament symbol display control process are made common, that is, realized by one program module. Thus, the capacity of the program executed by the production control microcomputer 100 may be reduced.

  39 and 40 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis processing (S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the RAM (S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (S612). When reading is performed, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  As the command receiving buffer, for example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 20) is a predetermined command among the production control commands stored in the buffer area.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the display result designation command (any one of the display result 1 designation command to the display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. The display result designation command storage area is stored (S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag (S622).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag (S624). ). If the received effect control command is a small hit / accuracy start designation command (S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / accuracy start designation command reception flag (S626).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (S627), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S628). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (S629), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S630).

  If the received production control command is a power-on designation command (initialization designation command) (S631), the production control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the production display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. (S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Control is performed (S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command or a jackpot end 2 designation command (S641), the effect control CPU 101 uses a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag as a corresponding flag. Is set (S642). If the received effect control command is a surprise 1 end designation command (S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / accuracy end designation command reception flag (S644).

  If the received effect control command is a surprise 2 end designation command (S644A), the effect control CPU 101 sets a surprise 2 end designation command reception flag (S644B). If the received effect control command is a small hit end specifying command (S644C), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit end specifying command reception flag (S644D).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (S645), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (S646). If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (S647), the production control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big prize opening (S648).

  If the received effect control command is the start prize designation command (S649), the effect control CPU 101 stores the start prize designation command in the start prize designation command storage area formed in the RAM and also displays the hold storage display. An unprocessed number counter indicating the number of start winning prizes that have not yet been processed is incremented by 1 (S650). As will be described later, the number of pending storages is added and displayed based on the value of the unprocessed number counter.

  When the received effect control command is not a start winning designation command but a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (C300 in FIG. 20) (S651), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts and updates the hold memory display. Processing to add 1 to the counter is performed (S652). Based on the value of the hold subtraction counter, the hold is subtracted and displayed as described later (see S669 to S671).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 executes processing corresponding to the received effect control command (S653), and proceeds to S611. The corresponding process is, for example, a process for setting a flag corresponding to the received command.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing specific control contents of the hold storage process in S705. The effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the unprocessed number counter is equal to or greater than “1” (S594). This unprocessed number counter is a counting means for counting the unprocessed number as the number of start winning prizes for which the pending storage display process has not yet been performed. Each time S660 to S667 of the hold storage display control process (FIG. 44) to be executed is executed, “1” is subtracted. If the unprocessed number counter is not “1” or more, the process proceeds to S601. If it is “1” or more, the process number counter is incremented by “1” (S595) and stored in the start winning designation command storage area. It is determined whether or not the starting winning designation command is the first starting winning designation command (S596). This start prize designation command is stored in the start prize designation command storage area in S650, and the first start prize designation command or the second start prize designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is the start prize. Stored in the specified command storage area. In the case of the first start winning designation command, the first-side winning specific area formed in the RAM of the production control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. Processing for storing the production-side reserved specific information including the data “1... 10” indicating the start prize is performed (S597). This is because the first start winning is processed in the order in which the stored storage data is generated.

  Here, the production-side holding specific information and the production-side holding specific area will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the configuration of the production-side reserved specific area in a table format. The production-side hold specific area corresponds to the upper limit value (8) of the hold memory counter, the presence / absence of stored information, the type of start prize (whether it is the first start prize or the second start prize, and , A type for specifying whether or not it is designated as a target of the pre-reading notice), and eight storage areas for storing eight pieces of presentation-side hold specifying information including the pre-reading determination result. Each storage area has a storage capacity of 1 byte. The reserved memory counter counts the number of start winning prizes that have not yet been used for variable display among the generated starting winning prizes, and is incremented by “1” by S666 and S667, which will be described later, and decremented by “1” by S671. The In this 1-byte storage area, in the most significant 1-bit storage area, storage presence / absence information indicating whether or not information corresponding to the pending storage is stored is stored in the 1-byte storage area. Specifically, if the most significant bit is “1”, it indicates that information corresponding to the reserved storage is stored, and if the most significant bit is “0”, information corresponding to the reserved storage is stored. Not shown. Of the 1-byte storage area, in the predetermined 2-bit (lower 2 bits) storage area, the start prize that has occurred is the first start prize or the second start prize, and The prize type information for specifying whether or not it is designated as the target of the prefetch notice is stored.

  Specifically, the information indicating that either “first” or “second” start winning is the first start winning designation command (C0xx) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560, the first 2 Determined according to the start winning designation command (C1xx). Such winning type information is composed of 2-bit data as described above. When the upper bit of the lower two bits is “1”, it indicates “first”, and the upper bit is “0”. In this case, “second” is indicated. When the least significant bit is “1”, it indicates that the presentation side reserved storage specifying information of the storage area is designated as the target of the prefetching notice (see S666), and when the least significant bit is “0”. Indicates that the production-side reserved storage specifying information of the storage area is not designated as the target of the pre-reading notice. Therefore, in the 1-byte storage area, when the most significant bit is “1”, information on the reserved storage of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stored based on the numerical data of the lower 2 bits. It is possible to specify whether or not the information is designated as a target of the prefetching notice.

  Further, in such a 1-byte storage area, the received start winning is received in a 5-bit storage area other than the above-described 3 bits (the most significant 1 bit for storing presence / absence information + the least significant 2 bits for winning type information). Prefetch determination result information is stored as numerical data for specifying the prefetch determination results (big hit and small hit types, variation pattern type of super reach B, etc.) indicated by the specified command. The prefetch determination result information corresponds to the prefetch determination result indicated by the received start winning designation command from among a plurality of numerical data associated with each of a plurality of types of prefetch determination results that can be specified by the start winning designation command. Numeric data is selected and stored.

  In the production-side reserved specific area in which such information is stored, in the eight storage areas, as shown in FIGS. 42 (A) to (C), “1” to “8” in the order of reception of the start winning designation command. In the storage area, the above-mentioned effect side reserved storage specific information, which indicates that “first start prize” or “second start prize” is stored by the lower 2 bits in each storage area, is stored. In FIG. 42, for ease of explanation, 1-byte reserved storage data (“1... 10”, “1. "First" or "second" is indicated before ().

  When there is only the first start winning prize storage data in the effect side holding specific area, as shown in FIG. 42A, the new first starting prize storage data (“1... 10”) is stored. , The latest processing order area (in this example, the area “3”) is stored. As a result, the stored data by the first start winning is processed in the order in which the stored data is generated.

  Further, when there is only the storage data for the first start winning, when the storage data (“1... 00”) is newly generated by the second start winning, the storage data is shown in FIG. As shown in B), the area of the processing order one before the data of the earliest processing order among the storage data stored by the first start winning (priority over all the first starting winning storage data) (In this example, “1” area). In that case, the storage area for the first start winning prize is shifted by one in a manner that the processing order is lowered by one. For example, in order to preferentially use the stored memory data from the second start prize for the variable display, in order to insert the reserved memory data from the second start prize in the area “1”, the reserved memory data (from the first start prize ( “1”, “2”, “3” in the original “1”, “2”, “3” area where the production-side reserved storage specific information is “2”, “3”, “4” The information is shifted one by one so as to be each production-side reserved storage specifying information of the area, and the storage data stored by the second start winning is stored in the empty “1” area.

  In addition, when there is already reserved storage data by the second start winning, the new reserved storage data is stored in the area of the next processing order of the reserved storage data. As a result, with respect to the storage data stored by the second start prize, the processing order is given priority regardless of the order of occurrence in relation to the storage data stored by the first start prize, and the storage data by the second start prize is stored. In the relationship, the processing order is in accordance with the generation order.

  In addition, in the production-side reserved specific area, when the production-side reserved storage specific information is designated as a prefetch notice target, the data in the area “5” (“1... 11”) in FIG. As described above, when the lower-order bit of the prize type information composed of the lower-order 2 bits in the production-side reserved storage specifying information is “1”, the reserved storage data to be pre-reading notice is specified. In this way, when the reserved storage data to be prefetched is specified, in order to display the reserved storage data in the notification mode (black circle) as shown in FIG. 13, the display data is displayed in S666 of FIG. 44 described later. After being set, the pre-reading notice target storage data is displayed in the notice form (black circle).

  When the determination result of S596 described above is the second start winning designation command, the effect side includes data “1... 00” indicating that the winning type information indicates the second start winning in the effect side reserved specific area. Processing for storing the hold specific information is performed (S598). Specifically, as described above, the storage data corresponding to the second start winning designation command has a priority in the processing order regardless of the generation order in relation to the storage data stored by the first start winning, and the second In relation to the stored storage data by the start winning, it is stored in an area where the processing order is in accordance with the generation order. When the hold storage data by the first start winning is present before the hold storage data by the second start winning is stored, the hold storage data by the first start winning is in a mode in which the processing order is decremented one by one. The storage area is shifted by one.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the second reserved memory is displayed with priority over the first reserved memory, the start winning designation command (the first start winning designation command and the second start is designated on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100). If the hold storage display is performed according to the order in which the winning designation command is received, it may not be possible to accurately indicate in which order the hold storage data is the notification target when performing the notification as shown in FIG. is there. Therefore, as described above, the priority between the first hold memory and the second hold memory (prioritizing the second hold memory) and the priority order between the same type of hold memories (the first occurrence is the hold memory). On the production control microcomputer 100 side, the distinction between the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is specified in the effect-side reserved specific area, and the processing order and prefetching of the reserved memory data are determined. Manage presence / absence of notice. As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that performs the variable display in preference to the second reserved memory, regarding the reserved memory display in the notice mode as shown in FIG. Can be shown. In the present embodiment, an example in which the hold storage display is performed without visually distinguishing between the first hold storage and the second hold storage is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, in the production control microcomputer 100, whether or not each hold storage display is the first hold memory or the second hold memory is specified by the data. Based on this, for example, the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory may be displayed in a visually distinguishable manner such that the display colors are different between the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory. In addition, when it is not specified whether the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not specified in the hold storage display, for example, as shown in FIG. 27, the first special symbol and the second special symbol (2) When the reserved memory data is stored in separate storage areas for the special symbols and the continuous notice is executed, the current number of reserved memories is confirmed, and the process for recognizing the reserved memory data for performing the continuous notice is performed. You may do it. In the case of using such a configuration, when a continuous award for the first special symbol is performed and a start prize for the second special symbol is generated, the stored data based on the start award is stored in the continuous notice. Management is performed to add as the number of reserved memory until the variable display by the reserved memory data of the first special symbol to be notified.

  Next, it is determined whether the unprocessed number counter and the processed number counter are equal (S599). Normally, the pending storage process is executed in a state where the start winning designation command is received once, so the value of the unprocessed number counter is “1”, and the values of the unprocessed number counter and the processed number counter are Are determined to be equal to each other, and the process proceeds to S600. However, when a game ball is won at the same time at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, the value of the unprocessed number counter is “2”, and NO is determined at S599, and S595 to S599. The above process is repeated once more. In preparation for the continuous reception of two start winning designation commands accompanying the simultaneous start winning, the start winning designation command storage area can store two start winning designation commands.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 clears (initializes) the processing number counter to “0” (S600).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the hold subtraction counter is equal to or greater than “1” (S601). This hold subtraction counter is incremented by “1” in S652 when a hold memory number subtraction designation command is transmitted. When the hold subtraction counter is “1” or more, the CPU 101 for effect control has the most processing order in the storage data (effect side hold specifying information) of the effect side hold specific area stored in the RAM. Is deleted, the remaining data is shifted one by one to the previous processing area (S602), and the process ends. In S601, when the value of the hold subtraction counter is “2” or more, it is determined after S602 whether or not the value of the hold subtraction counter after the subtraction update is “1” or more. If so, the process proceeds to S601 again, and the processes of S601 and S602 may be repeated until the value of the pending subtraction counter becomes “0”.

  As a result of such hold storage processing, the effect side hold specific area in the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 100 is in an order corresponding to the order in which the hold storage data is processed on the game control microcomputer 560 side, Data indicating the data in the first hold memory and data indicating the data in the second hold memory are stored as the production-side hold specifying information.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation display mode of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b are composed of two LEDs. And as shown in FIG. 43, it lights alternately every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second). When the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the upper LED is turned on as a display result of a decorative symbol reminiscent of the jackpot (see FIG. 43A). Further, when the display result of the special symbol is changed to the off symbol, the lower LED is turned on as the display result of the decorative symbol reminiscent of the off symbol (see FIG. 43B).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the hold storage display control process of S706. First, it is determined whether or not the value of the unprocessed number counter added in S650 is 1 or more (S660). When it is determined that the value of the unprocessed number counter is “1” or more, a process for displaying the hold storage is executed.

  In S661, it is determined whether the pre-reading notice execution flag (either the first or second pre-reading notice execution flag) or the pre-reading notice flag is set (S661). The pre-reading notice execution flag is a flag indicating that the pre-reading notice has already been executed, and either of the first and second pre-reading notice execution flags is set in S686 of FIG. 51 described later. The prefetch notice flag is a flag indicating that it is determined to perform the prefetch notice effect, and is set in S665 of FIG.

  When it is determined in S661 that the pre-reading notice execution flag or the prefetching notice flag is set, the value of the hold memory counter for specifying the hold memory number is incremented by 1, and then (A) and (B) in FIG. The display data for displaying the reserved storage in the normal mode as shown by () is set, and the reserved memory display in the normal mode is performed (S667).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S661 that neither the pre-reading notice execution flag nor the pre-reading notice flag is set, the corresponding start winning designation commands are the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit, the first sudden big hit, and the second sudden big hit. It is determined whether the command is a command that specifies a big hit such as a big hit, a command that specifies a small hit, or a command that specifies the above-described variation pattern type of super reach B (S662). As a result, it is determined whether or not the reserved storage designated by the start winning designation command is subject to the pre-reading notice. Whether or not the start winning designation command is a command for designating a big win, and whether or not the starting winning designation command is a command for designating a small win is determined by the pre-reading determination result indicated by the start winning designating command, This is done by determining whether a big hit or a small hit is indicated. Whether or not the start winning designation command is a command for designating the variation pattern type of Super Reach B is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the prefetch determination result indicates the variation pattern type of Super Reach B. Specifically, the variation pattern type based on the prefetch determination result is obtained by reading information on the prefetch determination result in the above-described performance-side hold identification information. The prefetch determination result may be obtained by reading information on the prefetch determination result specified by the command stored in the start winning designation command storage area.

  If it is determined in S662 that none of the command for designating the big hit, the command for designating the big hit, or the command indicating the variation pattern type of the super reach B, the process proceeds to S667. If it is determined in S662 that the command is for specifying a big hit, the command for specifying a small hit, or the command indicating the variation pattern type of Super Reach B, the production-side reserved storage specifying information (new Information including the variable display based on the start start designation command), and the pre-reading notice as the number of variable display that executes the pre-reading notice based on the predetermined calculation condition from the information of the variable display that has not been started yet. A process of calculating the number of times is performed (S663). In S663, specifically, the number of prefetch notices is calculated as follows. Based on the production-side reserved memory specifying information, it is determined whether the reserved memory determined to be the target of the pre-reading notice in S622 indicates the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When the first special symbol is the start winning prize, the total number of reserved memory number data of the first special symbol among all the presentation side reserved memory specifying information is calculated as the number of pre-reading notices. This is because when the continuous notice for the first special symbol is executed, the execution of the continuous notice is limited during the period in which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when it is the start winning of the second special symbol, the total number of the reserved memory number data of the second special symbol among all the production side reserved memory specifying information is calculated as the number of pre-reading notices. This is because the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variation display of the first special symbol, so that when the continuous notice for the second special symbol is executed, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. This is because the first special symbol variation display is not executed during the period in which is performed.

  As described above, the production control CPU 101 performs the production side hold memory specification as shown in FIGS. 42A to 42C by the hold storage processing of FIG. 41 based on the command transmitted from the main board 31. Information is stored in the RAM of the production control microcomputer 100. The process of S663 is performed using the production side hold storage specifying information stored in the RAM as described above. For example, referring to the production-side holding specific area in FIG. 42B, the production-side holding storage specifying information is stored as shown in the storage areas “1” to “4”. When the start winning is made at the second start winning opening 14 and the reserved memory is made the target of the pre-reading notice, the variable display based on the second start winning is executed with higher priority. Since the variable display is performed at the next time the variable display based on the production side hold storage specifying information specified by the “second” stored in the production side hold specific area “1” is executed. The number of pre-read notices is “2” including the hold memory that is the target of the pre-read notice. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 42 (B), for example, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the reserved memory is set as the target of the prefetching notice, Of the holding storages specified by the production-side holding storage specifying information of the four production-side holding specific areas “1” to “4”, the “second” in the production-side holding specifying area “1” is specified. Except for the production-side reserved memory specifying information, since the variable display based on the production-side reserved memory specifying information specified by the three “firsts” “2” to “4” is performed, the pre-reading is performed. The number of advance notices is “4” including the hold storage subject to the prefetch notice.

  In S664, it is determined whether or not the number of prefetch notices calculated in S663 is “2” or more. When it is determined that the number is 2 or more, the variable display for which the continuous notice of execution is not started yet other than the variable display based on the current start winning prize is displayed (the change is executed before the notice of the big hit) Since the pre-reading notice can be executed in a situation where there is a variable display), the lower byte data of the start winning designation command is set as the pre-reading notice flag (S665). Thereby, one of the prefetch determination results shown in FIG. 18 can be specified based on the prefetch notice flag. For example, based on the pre-read notice flag, it is possible to specify whether it is a win, if it is a win, what type it is, and what type of reach it is.

  If it is determined in S664 that the number is not 2 or more, it is the next time the variable display resulting from the current start winning is performed, and the process proceeds to S667 in order to prevent the pre-reading notice effect. On the other hand, when it is determined in S664 that the number is 2 or more, the process proceeds to S666 in order to perform the pre-reading notice effect.

  In S666, after the value of the reserved memory counter is incremented by 1, as shown in FIG. 13C, display data for displaying the reserved memory in the notice mode in which the target reserved memory is set to a black circle is set. Then, the hold storage display in such a notice mode is performed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the reserved memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. Further, in S666, a process of setting the least significant bit (the low order bit of the start winning type information) of the production side hold specific information that is the target of the prefetch notice to “1” is performed (for example, FIG. 42C). (Refer to “first (1... 11)” of the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory counter “5”). Thereby, it is specified by the prize type information that the storage is the target of the prefetch notice effect. Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the unprocessed number counter (S668), and the process proceeds to S660 again.

  When it is determined in S660 that the value of the unprocessed counter is not “1” or more, that is, when it is determined that the number of unprocessed is 0, the value of the pending subtraction counter added in S652 is “1” or more. It is determined whether or not there is (S669). When it is determined that the number is not 1 or more, the hold storage display control process is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the number is 1 or more, after the value of the reserved memory counter is subtracted, a process of subtracting and updating the reserved storage display (shifting by one) is performed (S670). Next, the value of the hold subtraction counter is decremented by 1 (S671), and the hold storage display control process is terminated. In S669, when the value of the hold subtraction counter is “2” or more, it is determined after S671 whether or not the value of the hold subtraction counter after the subtraction update is “1” or more. If so, the process proceeds to S660 again, and the processes of S660 and S669 to S670 may be repeated until the value of the pending subtraction counter becomes “0”.

  Note that the hold storage process shown in FIG. 41 and the hold storage display process shown in FIG. 44 are not used as separate subroutines as described above, but the functions of both processes are executed together in one subroutine. May be. Specifically, in FIG. 41, the processes of S595 and S600 are deleted. In FIG. 41, when it is determined in S594 that the unprocessed counter is “1” or more, the process proceeds to S596. Also, as a process to be executed after the end of S597 and after the end of S598, a series of processes of S661 to S668 of FIG. 44 is inserted. Further, it is determined whether or not the unprocessed number counter is “0” in the process of S599, and if it is not “0”, the process proceeds to S596, and if it is “0”, the process proceeds to S601. Furthermore, the processes of S670 and S671 are inserted after S602 of FIG. In this way, if the number of unprocessed items is 1 or more, it is possible to perform processing related to the hold storage display and processing related to the production side hold storage specifying information until it becomes 0. In addition, since it is possible to perform processing related to deletion of the hold storage display and processing related to deletion of the presentation side hold storage specific information, the function of the hold storage processing shown in FIG. 41 and the function shown in FIG. It can also have a function of a hold storage display process. Further, the above-described hold subtraction counter and the hold memory counter are counting means that indicate the number of unprocessed hold storage displays and the number of unprocessed hold-side storage specifying information. Therefore, the counter value can be reduced by using the counter for increasing / decreasing the reserved memory number when the reserved memory number increases, and the counter value increasing / decreasing when the reserved memory number decreases. Can do.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset, and the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (S801): Control is performed so that variation of the production symbol and the decoration symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. Then, when the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the effect symbol (and the decorative symbol) is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) Control to derive and display. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  Big hit display process (S804): After the end of the variation time, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of big hit or small hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S805).

  In-round processing (S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (S807). Note that in a gaming machine that executes a so-called probability variation promotion effect, a probability variation promotion effect is executed when the probability variation promotion effect execution flag indicating execution of the probability variation promotion effect is set.

  Post-round processing (S806): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (S805).

  Big hit end processing (S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG.

  In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 performs a stop order determination process in order to determine the stop order of the effect symbols (S500). The processing content of the stop order determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In the case of this embodiment, the effect symbols are defined as the order of stopping in the order of left, middle, and right symbols, and the order of stopping in the order of right, center, and left symbols is determined as the reverse order. Yes. In a state other than the latent mode described above, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the normal order. Also, in the latent mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the reverse order as compared to the state other than the latent mode. Control is performed to further increase the probability that the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the reverse order as compared to when the state is not in the state. In this way, it can be suggested that the probability that the probability variation state is hidden is high by increasing the frequency at which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the reverse order. Note that the types of stop order are not limited to those in the relationship between the normal order and the reverse order. For example, the first order that stops in the order of left, right, and middle symbols, and the left, middle, and right symbols Any combination may be used as long as the order of stopping is different, such as a combination with the second order of stopping in order.

  Even in a state other than the latent mode, the production symbols are stopped in a reverse order with a certain probability, and in the latent mode, the probability that the production symbols are stopped and displayed in the reverse order is higher than in a state other than the latent mode. Further, in the latent mode, the control may be performed to further increase the probability that the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the reverse order when it is in the probability variation state, compared to when it is not the probability variation state.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation display result is determined to be off (S501). Whether or not it is determined to be out of place is determined by, for example, whether or not a display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. Note that whether or not it is determined to be out of play may be confirmed based on a fluctuation pattern command that can specify whether to make a big hit or a small hit. If it is determined to be off, it is confirmed whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received as the variation pattern command (S502). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 101 uses the predetermined error symbol determination data table to determine a stop symbol that does not become a reach of the effect symbol ( The process proceeds to S504) and S516. In the loss symbol determination data table, the numerical data of SR1-1 to SR1-3 are associated with each of a plurality of types of effect symbols. In the process of S504, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and extracted using the detachable symbol determination data table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100. The symbol corresponding to the random number is determined as a combination of stop symbols resulting in a variation display result of the left, middle and right effect symbols. In this way, when determining a combination of non-reachable symbols, the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is a chance big hit symbol combination (probability big hit symbol combination, normal big hit symbol combination, random big hit symbol combination ( In this embodiment, the same as the combination of small winning symbols)), the stop symbols are determined by correcting (for example, correcting the right symbol by one symbol) so as to be a combination of symbols that are out of place. In addition, when the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is accidentally reached, it is corrected so as to be a combination of non-reach off symbols (for example, correction that shifts the middle symbol by one symbol) and stops each symbol. Is determined.

  When it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (when it is determined that the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern), the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the reach combination (S505). The process proceeds to S516. In the process of S505, numerical data (random number) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from SR1-1 is extracted using the loss symbol determination data table. A symbol corresponding to a random number that matches the counter value extracted from SR1-2 is determined as the stop symbol of the final stop symbol. The reach symbol is determined as the combination of the left and middle effect symbols when the stop order of the change display of the effect symbols is the normal order, and the right, when the stop order of the change display of the effect symbols is the reverse order, It is determined as a combination of the production effects inside. Then, the final stop symbol is determined as the right effect symbol when the stop order of the variation display of the effect symbol is the normal order, and the left effect when the stop order of the variable symbol display of the effect symbol is the reverse order. Determine as a symbol. In this case as well, when the symbol combination is accidentally a combination of symbols, the stop symbols are determined by correcting the symbols so that they become a combination of symbols that are out of place (for example, correction for shifting the middle symbol by one symbol).

  When it is not determined to be out of play (S501), the production control CPU 101 produces an effect that constitutes a combination of symbols that will be a big hit or a small hit according to the type of big hit and small hit including the big hit and the small hit. The stop symbol of the symbol is determined (S503), and the process proceeds to S516.

  In S503, the combination of the big hit symbols is determined according to the type of the big hit as described below, or the combination of the small hit symbols is determined according to the fact that it is the small hit.

  The effect control CPU 101 determines the type of jackpot based on which display result designation command among the display result 2 designation command to display result 6 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area, Judge that it is a hit.

  When it is determined that the probability variation big hit is decided, the probability variation big hit symbol determination table is used, and the combination of the probability variation big hit symbol (for example, “7, 7, 7” for the left, middle and right are either The combination of odd symbols is selected and determined. In the probability variation big hit symbol determination table, each of the numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of a plurality of predetermined probability variation big hit symbols. When determining the combination of probability variation jackpot symbols, the numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is combined with the combination of probability variation jackpot symbols using the probability variation jackpot design table. Is determined as a combination of stop symbols of the left, middle and right effect symbols. The symbol determined in this way is used as a final stop symbol which is a variation display result before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 101 determines that the normal big hit symbol is determined, the normal big hit symbol determination table is used to set the normal big hit symbol combination (for example, the left, middle and right are “2,” 2) ”is selected and determined. In the normal jackpot symbol determination table, each numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of a plurality of predetermined types of normal jackpot symbols. When determining the combination of the normal jackpot symbol, the numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is extracted from the normal jackpot symbol determination table. Is determined as a combination of stop symbols of the left, middle and right effect symbols.

  In addition, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines that it is determined to be the first hit probability hit or the second hit probability hit, a combination of the surprise hit symbol designs (for example, left, middle) , The right is a combination of chances such as “1, 2, 3”). In the accuracy symbol determination table, each numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of a plurality of types of accuracy symbol combinations. When determining the combination of the winning big hit symbol, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is configured using the winning symbol determination table. The combination of the stop symbol of the left, middle and right effect symbols is determined. As described above, when a big hit is made, the symbols may be replaced after the reach symbol combination is displayed once. The reach symbol at that time is the numerical value data (random number) extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is usually used as the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number using the table for determining the jackpot symbol. Determine as a combination. The reach symbol is determined as a combination of the left and middle effect symbols when the change display stop order of the effect symbol is the normal order, and the right and middle when the stop order of the effect change display is the reverse order. It is determined as a combination of the production symbols.

  When the effect control CPU 101 determines that it has been determined to make a small hit, the small hit symbol combination table (for example, “1, 1, 2) or 3 ”) is selected and determined. In the small hit symbol determination table, each numerical data of SR1-1 is associated with each of a plurality of types of small hit symbol combinations. When determining the small hit symbol combination, the numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is extracted from the small hit symbol determination table. Is determined as a combination of stop symbols of the left, middle and right effect symbols. Note that the multiple types of chance items in the small symbol design determination table may all be the same as the chance items in the accuracy symbol determination table, and some of them are the same as the chance events in the accuracy symbol determination table. May be. Further, the plurality of types of chance items in the small hit symbol determination table may be different from the chance items in the accuracy symbol determination table, but similar and difficult to distinguish. As described above, in the case of the small hit, the symbols may be replaced after the reach symbol combination is displayed once, as in the case of the sudden big hit. The reach symbol at that time is the numerical value data (random number) extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number is usually used as the symbol corresponding to the extracted random number using the table for determining the jackpot symbol. Determine as a combination.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect setting processing for setting the effect pattern (S516). Then, after executing the first notice setting process for setting the notice pattern of the pre-read notice (S516a), the second notice setting process for setting the notice pattern of the current notice is executed (S516b). After executing the second notice setting process, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect control pattern as one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns (S517). The production control CPU 101 uses various production control (production operation) patterns designated by the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the production pattern determined by the processing of S516, the notice pattern determined by the processing of S516a and S516b, and the like. In response, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the specified various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as a use pattern from among a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, the production display during the period from the start of the production design change until the final production design that is the final stop design is stopped and displayed. Data indicating the control contents of various effect operations such as the effect symbol display operation in the display area of the device 9, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation by the pseudo-ream or slip effect, and the effect display operation in the notice effect. Are stored as a plurality of symbol variation control patterns.

  In addition, each symbol variation control pattern is, for example, an effect symbol variation display such as an effect control process timer setting value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The control data for controlling the various types of performance operations is included, and the contents of the various types of performance control, the timing of switching the performance control, and the like are set in time series. As the symbol variation control pattern table, a symbol control pattern table composed of control data for controlling the effect operation of the effect symbol, and a control for controlling the effect operation of the notice effect different from the effect operation of the effect symbol By providing a notice control pattern table made up of data and using a combination of control data for controlling the effect operation of these effect symbols and control data for controlling the effect operation of the notice effect, one symbol variation You may comprise so that the production | presentation operation | movement similar to the case where the production | presentation operation of a symbol and the production | presentation operation of a notice may be performed with a control pattern table.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S517 (S518). Then, a process timer (production setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S519).

  After performing the process of S519, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect device (effect parts) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1). The control of the production display device 9 as various types, various lamps as production components, the speaker 27 as production components, and the movable members 78 and 84 as production components is started (S520). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. In addition, a drive signal for operating the movable member 78 is output in accordance with the movable member control data.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (S521), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802) (S522). ).

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a data table used for determining the stop order of effect symbols in the latent mode. 47 (a) shows a non-latency stop order determination table used for determining the stop order of the effect symbols when the probability variation state is a low probability state in which the probability variation state is not latent in the latent mode. ) Shows a latency stop order determination table used to determine the stop order of the effect symbols when the probability variation state is a high probability state in the latent mode.

  In the tables shown in (a) and (b), the relationship between the value of SR5 for determining the symbol stop order and the stop order to be determined is shown. In the non-latent stop order determination table of (a), data is selected so that the normal order is selected when the value of SR5 is 1 to 29, and the reverse order is selected when the value of SR5 is 30 to 53. Is set. In the latent stop order determination table of (b), the data is so selected that the normal order is selected when the value of SR5 is 1 to 24, and the reverse order is selected when the value of SR5 is 25 to 53. Is set. In the latency stop order determination table of (b), data is set so that the ratio of the stop order determined in the reverse order is higher than that of the non-latency stop order determination table of (a). As a result, when the probability variation state is latent in the latent mode, it is possible to indicate to the player that the probability variation state is latent by increasing the frequency at which the production symbols stop in the reverse order in the variation display. Become.

  In FIG. 47, data is set so that the normal order is more easily selected than the reverse order in the non-latent stop order determination table of (a), and in the reverse stop order determination table of (b), the reverse order. Data is set so that the order is easier to select than the normal order. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the data is set so that the forward order is more easily selected than the reverse order in the latent stop order determination table of (b), and the latent stop order determination table of (b) is more suitable. Data may be set so that the reverse order can be selected more easily than the non-latent stop order determination table of (a). A specific example of such data setting is as follows. For example, in the non-latent stop order determination table of (a), the normal order is selected when the value of SR5 is 1 to 50, and the reverse order is selected when the value of SR5 is 51 to 53. Set the data to. In the latent stop order determination table (b), the normal order is selected when the value of SR5 is 1 to 45, and the reverse order is selected when the value of SR5 is 46 to 53. If the data is set in this way, in the latent mode, the proportion of fluctuation display is basically high in the normal order, and when the probability variation state is latent in the latent mode, the probability variation state is not latent. As compared with, the ratio of the variable display in the reverse order becomes higher.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a stop order determination process (S500) in the effect symbol variation start process. In the special symbol stop process, it is determined whether or not the latent mode flag is set (S701). The latent mode flag is a flag that is set at the time of the end of the first big hit big hit and the end of the small hit in the big hit end effect process of S807, and is a flag that is set when in the latent mode.

  When it is determined in S701 that the latent mode flag is set, since the latent mode is not set, the stop order of the effect symbols is determined to be the normal order (S702), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S701 that the latent mode flag is set, it is determined whether or not the first after-latency latent flag is set (S703). The first post-hit chance latency flag is a flag that is set at the end of the first hit probability big hit in the big hit end effect process of S807, and is set when the latent mode is set after the first hit big hit end. Flag. It is to be noted that a probability change state flag indicating a probability variation state based on the reception of an effect control command (which may be an effect control command designating that the probability variation state is designated) that designates that the probability variation state is to be achieved after a big hit. In the case of the configuration in which the effect control microcomputer 100 recognizes whether or not it is in the probability variation state by setting, the first after-accumulation latency flag is not provided by the probability variation state effect control command. It may be determined whether or not the status flag is set, and the process may proceed to S704 when the probability variation state flag is set, and may proceed to S705 when the probability variation state flag is not set. In this way, the same determination as in the case of using the first post-accuracy latent latent flag can be made in S703, and the number of flags used for control can be reduced.

  If it is determined in S703 that the first after-latency latency flag is set, the probability change state has been established, so the suspension order of the effect symbols is determined using the latency stop order determination table of FIG. 47 (b). (S704), and the process ends. Specifically, in S704, SR5 for determining the symbol stop order is extracted, and the normal order or the reverse order is determined as the stop order corresponding to the extracted value using the latent stop order determination table.

  When it is determined in S703 that the first after-latency latent latency flag is not set, the probability change state is not established, so that the stop order of the production symbols is determined using the non-latent stop order determination table in FIG. Determination is made (S705), and the process ends. Specifically, in S705, the symbol stop order determination SR5 is extracted, and the normal order or reverse order is determined as the stop order corresponding to the extracted value using the non-latency stop order determination table.

  The stop order determination process as described above is executed every time the variable display is performed once. Thereby, every time the variable display is performed once, the stop order is determined to be either the forward order or the reverse order. When the stop order is determined in this way, when the reach symbol is determined in S505 of FIG. 46, which of the left, middle, and right symbols is determined as the reach symbol is determined according to the stop order. Is done.

  The stop order determination process may be executed once every time the variable display is performed a plurality of times, such as once every time the variable display is performed five times. In this way, for example, the stop order determined according to the gaming state is continuously used a plurality of times, for example, the reverse order is continuously performed a plurality of times, so that the probability change state is hidden in the latent mode. This can be done with emphasis on whether or not it is present. In addition, when determining the stop order of the effect symbols using the non-latent stop order determination table and the latent stop order determination table in the latent mode, for example, when the display result is out of reach, the display result is out of place. It may be performed only when In this way, for example, it is possible to reduce the processing load of effect control when it becomes out of reach through reach, and it is possible to reduce the processing load of effect control when it is a big hit. Further, for example, even when the display result is not reach but shifts, it is possible to attract the player's interest as to whether or not the display mode is the latent mode.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process of S516. In the effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 determines in S1551 whether or not a specific effect such as “slip” and “pseudo-continuous” is determined as an effect that needs to be determined as a temporary stop symbol (S1551). ). Whether or not the specific effect is performed is determined according to whether or not “slip” or “pseudo ream” is indicated by the variation pattern command. When the specific effect is not performed, the effect setting process is terminated, and when the specific effect is performed, the temporary stop symbol is determined as follows.

  In the case of the “slip” effect, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of slipping, and determines the temporary stop symbol based on the extracted value of the random number SR3 ( S1552).

  When determining the pseudo consecutive chance in the process of S1552, the CPU 101 for effect control uses the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 to combine temporary stop symbols. To decide. In the quasi-continuous temporary stop symbol determination table, each numerical data of SR4-1 to SR4-4 is associated with each combination of a plurality of predetermined temporary stop symbols. The temporary stop symbol determined based on the numerical data extracted from SR4-1 is determined as the pseudo continuous first temporary stop symbol. The temporary stop symbol determined based on the numerical data extracted from SR4-2 is determined as the pseudo continuous second temporary stop symbol. The temporary stop symbol determined based on the numerical data extracted from SR4-3 is determined as the pseudo continuous third temporary stop symbol. The temporary stop symbol determined based on the numerical data extracted from SR4-4 is determined as the pseudo continuous fourth temporary stop symbol.

  Specifically, in the case of the production of “pseudo-continuous”, the pseudo-continuous first temporary stop symbol determining random number SR4-1 to the pseudo-continuous The 3 temporary stop symbol determining random number SR4-3 is selected, and each random number is extracted to determine each of the temporary stop symbol at the first temporary stop to the temporary stop symbol at the third temporary stop.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the timing at which the notice effect is performed when the variation display of the normal variation (without pseudo-continuous) and when the pseudo-variable variation display is performed will be described. FIG. 50 is a timing chart for explaining the effect when the variation display of the normal variation (without pseudo-continuous) is performed and the effect when the pseudo-variable variation display is performed.

  FIG. 50A is a timing chart in the case where change display is performed due to normal change (without pseudo-continuous). Timing 1 indicates the timing when the fluctuation starts. Timing 2 shows the timing when time T has elapsed from timing 1 and the confirmed effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Timing 3 indicates a timing when pseudo-variable display (with a notice effect) is started as the next variable display.

  FIG. 50B is a timing chart in the case where the variable display is performed once in the pseudo-series. As shown between the timings 1 and 2, after the first fluctuation is performed and the chance eye is stopped, the second fluctuation is performed and the symbol that is not the final effect design is stopped. FIG. 50C is a timing chart in the case where the fluctuating display is performed twice. As shown between the timings 1 and 2, the first fluctuation is performed to stop the chance, the first re-variation is performed, the chance is stopped again, and the second re-variation is performed to confirm. The off-line design is stopped as the production design.

  When various notice effects are executed during the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation that does not become a pseudo-continuous, as shown in (A), the notice effect is executed once during the fluctuation display. On the other hand, when various notice effects are executed during the pseudo-variable display, the notice effects are executed in the initial fluctuation in the pseudo-continuous and each re-variation after the initial fluctuation, as will be described later. For this reason, between the timings 1 and 2, according to the number of fluctuations, the notice effect is executed twice in (B) and three times in (C).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the first notice setting process of S516a.
In the first notice setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch notice flag is set (S682). The prefetch notice flag is set in S665 of the above-described hold storage display control process. When it is determined that the pre-reading notice flag is set, the type of the pre-reading notice effect is determined from the hit notice type and the button notice type using the first notice type determination table shown in FIG. (S683). In the process of S683, the value of the random number SR6 for determining the first notice type as the pre-read notice is extracted, and the notice of the first notice effect is obtained according to the data of the first notice type determination table selected as described above. Determine the type. In S683, any one of the first notice types is selected and determined by the allocation set corresponding to each of the pre-reading determination results indicated by the received first start winning designation command or second start winning designation command. . In S683, the prefetch determination result indicated by the received first start prize designation command or the second start prize designation command is received based on the prefetch judgment result information of the hold storage data that is the prefetch notice target in the production side hold identification information. judge. As described above, since the information of the prefetch determination result is stored also in the data of the prefetch notice flag, the received first start winning designation command is received based on the information of the prefetch judgment result indicated by the data of the prefetch notice flag. Alternatively, the prefetch determination result indicated by the second start winning designation command may be determined.

  Next, in S684, a notice pattern corresponding to the notice type decided in S683 is determined. In the process of S684, the value of the random number SR6 for determining the notice pattern is extracted, and the notice pattern determination table corresponding to the type of the prefetch notice determined in S683 (the notice pattern determination table for the hit notice in FIG. 53, or , Using a button notice notice pattern determination table (not shown), a look-ahead notice notice pattern (for example, one of the notice pattern using the character A and the notice pattern using the character B described above for the hit notice, For the button notice, one of a low reliability notice pattern, a medium reliability notice pattern, and a high reliability notice pattern is determined. In S684, the notice pattern is determined by the allocation set corresponding to the display result included in the prefetch determination result indicated by the received first start winning designation command or second start winning designation command. In S684, the prefetch determination result indicated by the received first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command is based on the prefetch judgment result information of the hold storage data that is the prefetch notice target in the production side hold identification information. Identify the display result information included. As described above, since the information of the prefetch determination result is stored also in the data of the prefetch notice flag, the received first start winning designation command is received based on the information of the prefetch judgment result indicated by the data of the prefetch notice flag. Or you may make it determine the information of the display result contained in the prefetch determination result which a 2nd start winning designation | designated designation | designated command shows.

  Note that in S684, when the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command is a pseudo-continuous, the announcement effect by the determined notice pattern is executed in the initial variation in the pseudo-continuous and each re-variation after the initial variation. Process data is set. If it is determined that the button notice effect is to be displayed during the pseudo-series variation display, the operation valid period for effectively accepting the button operation is set for each initial variation of the pseudo-series and each re-variation after the first variation. Process data is set. In addition, when it is determined that the button notice effect is to be performed during the pseudo-series fluctuation display, the button operation is performed for any one of the pseudo-series initial fluctuation and each re-variation after the initial fluctuation. It is also possible to set process data for setting an operation valid period to be accepted effectively, and to perform button notice effect only by any one variation display in the pseudo-series.

  Next, in S685, the prefetch notice flag is reset. In S686, a pre-reading notice execution flag, which is a flag indicating that the process for prefetching notice corresponding to the notice type (winning notice, button notice) is being executed, is set. As the pre-reading notice execution flag, the first pre-reading notice execution flag used when the reserved storage data subject to the pre-reading notice is of the first special symbol (first reservation storage) type, and the pre-reading notice One of the second pre-reading notice execution flags used when the reserved storage data that is the target of the second special symbol (second reserved storage) type is set. Specifically, when the start prize designation command stored in the start prize designation command storage area formed in the RAM is the first start prize designation command, the storage for holding the variable display of the first special symbol is stored. Since the first pre-reading notice execution flag is set and the second start winning designation command is set, the on-hold storage for displaying the variation of the second special symbol is the target of the pre-reading notice. Therefore, the second pre-reading notice execution flag is set. In S686a, 1 is subtracted from the value of the prefetch notice counter, and the process is terminated. The pre-reading notice counter is initialized with the value calculated in S663 described above, and is subtracted in S686a and S693 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S682 that the prefetching advance notice flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the first prefetching advance notice flag is set (S687). When it is determined that the first pre-reading notice execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the second pre-reading notice execution flag is set (S688). If it is determined in S687 that the first pre-reading notice execution flag is not set and the second pre-reading notice execution flag is not set in S688, the pre-reading notice is not scheduled to start, and Since the pre-reading notice is not being executed, the first notice setting process is terminated.

  When it is determined in S687 that the first pre-reading notice execution flag is set, it is determined whether or not the starting variable display is the variable display of the second special symbol (S689). Specifically, in S689, when the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 20) is received at the start of variation display, it is determined that the variation display to be started is the variation display of the second special symbol.

  Further, when it is determined in S688 that the second pre-reading notice execution flag is set, and when it is determined that the variation display started in S689 is not the variation display of the second special symbol (the start of variation display) (Sometimes when the first symbol variation designation command is received), the process proceeds to S690. In S690, it is determined whether or not the change display to be started is a change display of Super Reach A (S690). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the change display of the super reach A is based on whether or not the change pattern command received as a trigger for starting the change display is a change pattern command indicating the super reach A.

  The processing when it is determined in S690 that the display of the super reach A is changed will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S690 that the display is not the fluctuation display of the super reach A, the process proceeds to S692 in order to perform a continuous notice as a prefetch notice.

  In S692, the pre-reading notice is determined to be the same notice pattern as the previous change in order to make the same notice as the previous change display even during the current change display (S692). As a result, the prefetching notice effect of the same effect mode is repeatedly executed continuously until the variable display that is the target of the prefetching notice is completed. Such a notice that is continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays is referred to as a continuous notice. Note that the pre-reading notice is not executed over a plurality of variable displays as a continuous notice, but only one variable display that is newly started after the reserved storage information due to the start winning that is the target of the pre-reading notice is generated. You may make it perform a notice in.

  Next, in S693, 1 is subtracted from the value of the prefetch notice counter. In S692, if the variation pattern to be executed is a pseudo-continuous, the process data for executing the notice effect by the determined notice pattern in the initial variation in the pseudo-continuous and each re-variation after the initial variation. Is set. If it is determined that the button notice effect is to be displayed during the pseudo-series variation display, the operation valid period for effectively accepting the button operation is set for each initial variation of the pseudo-series and each re-variation after the first variation. Process data is set.

  Next, in S694, it is determined whether or not the value of the prefetch notice counter subtracted in S693 is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is a variation display subject to notice. When it is determined that the value of the prefetch notice counter is not “0”, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pre-reading notice number counter is “0”, the pre-reading notice effect is ended by the notice in the current variable display, so the pre-reading notice execution flag in the set is reset (S695). Then, the first notice setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in S690 that the display of the super reach A is fluctuating, the prefetch notice counter is reset (set to 0) (S696) to end the prefetch notice effect, and the prefetch in the set The advance notice flag is reset (S695), and the process ends.

  In this way, when the pre-reading notice effect is being executed and the variable display of the super reach A is started, the pre-reading notice effect being executed is forcibly ended. By performing such control, it is possible to stop the pre-reading notice effect as necessary with respect to the presentation of the variable display. Can be prevented from falling into. Here, in S690, the reason why the super-reach B is not targeted as the variation pattern for ending the pre-reading notice effect is as follows. As described above, with respect to the super reach B, it is possible to accurately perform the prefetch determination by assigning a common determination value regardless of whether or not it is in a time-saving state and the number of reserved storages. Therefore, unless the variable display based on the second reserved storage is interrupted and executed during execution of the continuous notice, it does not occur unexpectedly during the continuous notice. Therefore, it is anticipated that Super Reach B will not be executed before the change display of the advance notice object when the pre-read determination for the continuous notice being executed is performed. It is not a variation pattern that ends the process. Thereby, in S690, it is judged only for super reach A as a change pattern which ends prefetch notice production.

  If it is determined that the variation display started in S689 is the variation display of the second special symbol, the first notification setting process is terminated without setting the notification pattern of the continuous notification as described above. Thereby, when the continuous notice effect based on the hold storage data of the first hold storage buffer is performed, the hold storage data is stored in the second hold storage buffer, and the second hold is given priority over the first hold storage data. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the stored data is executed, the continuous announcement as the pre-reading announcement is prohibited for the variation display of the second special symbol, and the continuous announcement is temporarily stopped. By performing such control, when the second special symbol variation display is executed in such a state, the continuous announcement is not performed, so the target of the continuous announcement effect is the variation display of the second identification information. This is clearly indicated by the effect, so that the player can easily recognize the variable display of the identification information that is the target of the continuous notice effect.

  Further, as will be described later with reference to the second notice setting process of FIG. 54, when a continuous notice effect based on the stored data in the first reserved memory buffer is performed, the variable display based on the first reserved memory data is executed. This announcement is prohibited for all variable displays that are executed before the announcement. Therefore, when the continuous notice effect based on the hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer is performed, the hold storage data is stored in the second hold storage buffer, and the second hold storage is given priority over the first hold storage data. When the change display of the second special symbol based on the data is executed, no notice effect is performed, so the effect clearly indicates that the subject of the continuous notice effect is not the change display of the second special symbol. Thus, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the change display of the special symbol that is the target of the continuous notice effect.

  When the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading determination for the first special symbol is being executed, when the variable display of the second special symbol that is the jackpot display result is started, the pre-reading notice effect being executed is compulsory. It is also possible to be prohibited by terminating automatically. By performing such control, the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state before the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a based on the data of the first reserved memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. Even if a big win gaming state occurs, the pre-reading notice is continued until the big hit gaming state ends even if the variable display of the second special symbol display 8b based on the stored storage data for specifying the priority is performed. It is possible to prevent the performance from being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling more than necessary about the continuous occurrence of the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect based on the first reserved storage data that does not become a big hit is executed by the pre-reading determination for the first special symbol, the variable display or reach of the second special symbol that is the big hit display result is executed. When the off-change display is started, control for forcibly terminating the pre-reading notice effect being executed may be performed.

  In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect based on the first reserved storage data that does not result in a big hit is executed by the pre-reading determination for the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit display result is started. Sometimes, the pre-reading notice effect being executed is forcibly ended, but when the variable display that is out of reach is started, control may be performed so as not to forcibly end the pre-reading notice effect being executed.

  In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect by the pre-reading determination for the first special symbol is being executed, when the variation display of the second special symbol that is the jackpot display result is started, the variation to be started is a pseudo-continuous. It may be further determined whether or not the display is variable display, and when the display is pseudo-variable display, the process may advance to S696 in order to end the pre-reading notice being executed.

  Further, when the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading determination for the first special symbol is being executed, whether or not the variable display to be started is the variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the super reach B. If the second special symbol variation display and the super reach B variation display are performed, the process may advance to S696 in order to end the pre-reading notice being executed.

  Next, the first notice type determination table will be described. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram of a first notice type determination table.

  The first notice type determination table includes a hit notice and a button notice as types of the first notice effect for performing the pre-reading notice for determining the first notice type based on the value of the random number SR6 for determining the type of the first notice effect. It is a data table used in order to select and determine the type of the notice effect to be executed from among the types. In the first notice type determination table, the notice effect type is determined according to the determination value determined for each prefetch determination result indicated by the received first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command. The relationship between the prefetch determination result and each determination value of the hit notice and the button notice is shown. The pre-reading determination result is obtained by reading the pre-reading determination result information of the pre-stored storage data that is the pre-reading notice target in the above-described production-side holding specific information. The prefetch determination result may be obtained by reading information on the prefetch determination result specified by the command stored in the start winning designation command storage area.

  As the pre-reading determination result, the pre-reading determination result of “displacement and super reach B” shown in No 1, the pre-reading determination result of “small hit and any variation pattern type” shown in No 2, “first” shown in No 3 The pattern of “Crushing big hit and any variation pattern type”, the pattern “No. 2 of the big bumps and variation pattern type” shown in No4, “The normal big hit and any fluctuation pattern” shown in No5 For each of the “type” pattern and the “probable variation big hit and any variation pattern type” pattern shown in No. 6, the determination values of the hit notice and the button notice are assigned. For example, “probable big hit and any variation pattern type” means that the display result is a probable big hit and the variation pattern type is any variation pattern type.

  In addition, when the big hit or the small hit, the example that can be subject to the look-ahead notice regardless of the type of the hit has been described, but not limited to this, for example, among the big hit and the small hit, 9R long-term big hit (probable big hit, It may be possible to be subject to a pre-reading notice when it becomes a normal big hit. Further, it may be possible to be subject to the pre-reading notice only when the 9R short-term big hit (first sudden hit big hit, second sudden hit big hit) and small hit. In addition, in the example that can be subject to the pre-reading notice regardless of the type of hit when it is a big hit or a small hit, the 9R short-term big hit (the first sudden hit big hit, the second sudden hit big hit) and the small hit and the 9R long-term hit The type of the notice effect that is performed as the pre-reading notice may be different depending on the big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit).

  In the first notice type determination table, the determination value is set so that the percentage selected when the hit notice is a hit is higher than that of the button notice. With such a setting, when the hitting notice is executed, the player's expectation can be improved based on the fact that the ratio of winning a big hit is higher than when the button notice is executed.

  Further, in the first notice type determination table, the determination value is set so that the ratio of being selected when the big hit or the small hit is high is higher than when the big hit or the small hit is lost. With such a setting, the player's expectation can be improved on the basis of the fact that the percentage selected for the winning notice is higher than that when the winning is lost.

  Further, in the first notice type determination table, when the hit notice is 9R long-term big hit (probable big hit, normal big hit), it becomes 9R short-term big hit (first sudden hit big hit, second sudden hit big hit) or small hit. The determination value is set so that the selected ratio is higher than the time. With such a setting, the player's expectation is improved based on the fact that the ratio of selecting the hit notice is higher when the 9R long-term big hit is selected than when the 9R short-term big hit or the small hit is made. be able to.

  In the first notice type determination table, regarding the button notice, the determination value is set so that the ratio of being selected is smaller when the big hit or the small hit is lost than when the button is lost.

  Further, in the first notice type determination table, when the button notice is made, the 9R long-term big hit (probability big hit, normal big hit) becomes the 9R short-term big hit (the first sudden hit big hit, the second sudden hit big hit) or the small hit. The determination value is set so that the selected ratio is lower than the time.

  In the first notice type determination table of FIG. 52, regarding the decision value distribution, the decision value setting for button notice and the decision value setting for hit notice may be reversed. In the first notice type determination table in FIG. 52, the button notice need not be provided. In that case, a plurality of types of hit notices with different effects may be provided, and the notice effect may be performed using the hit notices selected at a predetermined ratio. If no button notice is provided as the first notice, the “button notice” field in FIG. 52 is replaced with the “no notice” field, and the extracted value of SR6 for determining the type of the first notice effect is It may be determined not to perform the first notice when it matches the numerical data corresponding to the column without notice. As described above, when “no notice” is selectable, even if the same type of start winning designation command is received, the continuous notice (in this example, as the number of reserved memories increases) It is desirable to increase the proportion of people who choose to carry out the (announcement). In this case, the ratio of selecting to perform the continuous notice is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss. As described above, when “no advance notice” can be selected, when it is specified by the received start winning designation command that a big hit, a small hit, or a super-reach B out of reach is specified, the “win notice” is set. The determination to execute “winning notice” may be made without determining whether to “no notice”. As for the first notice as the pre-read notice, as shown in FIG. 52, when the first notice is executed, a big hit or a small hit is always made, or an example in which super reach B is executed is shown. It was. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the first notice effect is executed, it may be set so as not to be a big hit, a small hit or a super reach B at a certain rate. Specifically, in FIG. 52, a command for selecting a winning prize or a button notice is added as a command for selecting a winning prize or a bonus game, and a start winning designation command that is neither super-reach B nor received is received. The SR6 judgment value is assigned to each of the winning notice and the button notice, and the winning notice or the button notice is executed even when a start winning designation command is received that is neither a big hit or a small hit nor super reach B. Can be selected.

  Further, as the first notice type determination table, for each of the small hit, the sudden big hit, the normal big hit, and the probable big hit, the distribution of the determination place of the button notice and the hit notice is made different according to the variation pattern type. Data may be set as described above.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, when the big hit and the small win are determined, the variation pattern type is not determined, and the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the variation pattern type. Also good.

  Next, the notice pattern determination table for the hit notice used in S684 of the first notice effect setting process will be described. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice pattern determination table for winning notice.

  The hit notice notice pattern determination table is used for selecting and determining the notice pattern of the hit notice in the first notice effect from a plurality of notice patterns based on the value of the random number SR7 for determining the first notice pattern. It is a data table. In the notice pattern determination table for winning notice, the winning / notifying pattern is determined so that the notice pattern is determined according to a determination value determined according to whether the display result of the variable display to be executed is a big hit or not. The relationship between the display result of the loss and the notice pattern is shown. For example, there are a plurality of types of patterns for different types of characters that appear during the hit notice. The display result of winning / losing can be obtained by reading the information of the prefetch determination result in the above-mentioned production side holding specific information. The prefetch determination result may be obtained by reading information on the prefetch determination result specified by the command stored in the start winning designation command storage area.

  When the display result is out of order and the value extracted from the random number SR7 is “1 to 90”, the character A (for example, the character 91A shown in FIG. 13 (E1)) is determined, and “91 to 105”. In some cases, character B (for example, character 91B shown in FIG. 13 (E2)) is determined.

  When the display result is a win and the value extracted from the random number SR6 is “1-10”, the character A is determined, and when the value is “11-105”, the character B is determined.

  As described above, in the notice pattern determination table for the hit notice shown in FIG. 53, the character A is easily determined when the display result is out of order, and the character B is easily determined when the display result is a big hit or a small hit. The judgment value is set so that As a result, when the hitting notice is executed with the notice pattern using the character B, the percentage of big hits is higher than when the winning notice is executed with the notice pattern using the character A. Can be improved.

  It should be noted that when a probable jackpot notice as shown in (G1) and (G2) of FIG. 13 is executed, the character type is determined according to a determination value determined depending on whether or not the probable jackpot. You may comprise. For example, with regard to the hit notice shown in the first notice type determination table, the numerical data of the random number SR7 is allocated separately for the probability variation big hit and other than the probability variation big hit, and when the probability variation big hit becomes other than the probability variation big hit, The determination value may be set so that the rate at which character B is selected is higher than that of character A. In this case, the reliability with respect to the probable big hit can be varied depending on the type of character. In addition, the character type is determined in accordance with a determination value determined so that the selection ratio varies depending on the hit type, such as probability variation big hit, normal big hit, first big hit big hit, second big hit big hit, and small hit. You may comprise as follows. In this case, depending on the type of character, the reliability of being a big hit advantageous to the player can be varied. Specifically, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53, the character type is determined according to a determination value determined so that the selection ratio of the character differs depending on the type of hit including big hit and small hit. May be.

  In addition, the notice pattern determination table for button notices shows that the display results for low reliability notice patterns, medium reliability notice patterns, and high reliability notice patterns are larger than when the display results are out of order. The determination value is set so that a notice pattern with high reliability is easily determined. As a result, the higher the reliability, the higher the probability of winning the button notification, the higher the player's expectation.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the second notice setting process of S516b.
In the second notice setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the first pre-read notice executing flag is set (S731).

  When it is determined in S731 that the first pre-reading notice execution flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the second pre-reading notice execution flag is set (S732). If it is determined in S732 that the second pre-reading notice execution flag is not set, the type of notice effect of the current notice (no notice, group notice, step is used) using the second notice type determination table shown in FIG. Any type of up notice is determined (S733), and the process proceeds to S734. In the process of S733, the value of the random number SR8 for determining the second notice type is extracted, and the type of the notice effect for the current notice is determined according to the value of the random number SR8 using the second notice type determination table. As described above, in S733, when selecting the type of the notice effect for the current notice, there is a case where the current notice is not executed (no notice) is selected.

  55, when the notice type of the group notice is selected as the notice effect type of the current notice using the second notice type determination table shown in FIG. 55, the process after the time when at least one of the effects symbols is stopped As shown in FIG. 58, a predetermined notice image is displayed at a timing different from the timing when the pre-reading notice is executed (see FIG. 58). Further, when the notice type of the step-up notice is selected, a timing different from the timing at which the prefetch notice is executed, such as a predetermined timing after at least one of the effect symbols is stopped (FIG. 58). Notice) is performed.

  In S734, it is determined whether or not “no notice” is selected as a result of the type determination in S733 (S734). If no notice is selected, the notice is not executed this time, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when selection of no notice is not determined, that is, when the type of group notice or step-up notice is selected and decided, a notice pattern corresponding to the notice type decided in S733 is decided (S735). In the process of S735, when the group notice type or the step-up notice type is selected, a notice pattern determination table (for example, a group notice not shown) corresponding to the present notice type determined in S733 is selected. The notice pattern corresponding to the current notice is determined using the notice pattern determining table or the notice pattern determining table for the step-up notice shown in FIG. 56, and the process ends.

  When it is determined in S731 that the first pre-reading notice execution flag is set, the second notice setting process is terminated without determining the notice pattern of the current notice in the processes of S733 to S735. As a result, when a continuous advance notice for the first hold storage data stored in the first hold storage buffer is performed, the change display based on the target first hold storage data is executed before the change display is executed. This notice is forbidden for all variable displays. Note that, as shown in FIG. 61, the timing at which the current notice is executed is different from the timing at which the prefetch notice is executed, and therefore, it is executed at the timing (see FIG. 61).

  If it is determined in S732 that the second pre-reading notice execution flag is set, the second notice setting process is terminated without determining the notice pattern of the current notice in the processes of S733 to S735. As a result, when the continuous notice for the second reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer is performed, it is executed before the variable display based on the target second reserved memory data is executed. This notice is forbidden for all variable displays.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the timing at which the current notice and the prefetch notice are executed is different, so that the player can identify whether the executed notice is the current notice or the prefetch notice. In the second notice setting process, the process such as S731 and S732 may not be performed so that the current notice and the prefetch notice can be executed in the same variable display.

  In the high base state (short time state), the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state is higher than in the low base state. The special symbol variable display is executed with priority. Therefore, in the high base state, when it is decided to perform the continuous notice for the first start winning prize, the continuous notice is retained by giving priority to the variable display of the second special symbol. If the game progresses, a big hit based on the change display of the second special symbol may occur, and the player may be overwhelmed. In order to prevent such an adverse effect, in the high base state, as shown in S214 and S219 of FIG. 23, the prefetch determination for the first reserved storage is not performed. Therefore, the prefetch determination for the first reserved storage is performed only when the base is low. In such a low base state, with regard to the first special symbol, when it is determined in S662 of FIG. 44 that a variation pattern type for performing a continuous notice such as big hit, small hit, or super reach B is designated by the command, 44, the pre-reading notice flag is set in S665 and the first pre-reading notice execution flag is set in S686 in FIG. 51. Thus, the first special symbol is targeted at such a low base. When the second special symbol is displayed in the state where the continuous notice is being performed, the determination is made in S731, and the process ends due to the first pre-reading notice execution flag set, and the first hold When continuous notice for memory is performed, this notice is prohibited for the variable display of the second special symbol.

  In addition, since it is prohibited to make the current notice for the variable display of the second special symbol in the low base state, the existence of the continuous notice effect executed for the variable display of the first special symbol is further clarified. Can stand out. In addition, in the high base state, by not performing the process of determining the notice pattern of the current notice as in S733 to S735, the number of executions of the process steps that need to be executed every time the variable display is performed can be reduced. Thereby, the control burden of the production control microcomputer 100 in the high base state can be reduced.

  Even in the high base state (short-time state), the prefetch determination for the first reserved memory may be performed, and the prefetch notice (continuous notice) may be executed based on the determination result.

  Next, the second notice type determination table will be described. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram of a second notice type determination table.

  The second notice type determination table determines whether to execute the second notice effect based on the value of the random number SR8 for determining the type of the second notice effect, and sets the type of the second notice effect as a group. It is a data table used for selecting and determining the type of notice effect to be executed from the notice types of the notice and step-up notice. In the second notice type determination table, the second notice effect is determined according to the determination value determined for each variation pattern according to which variation pattern among the variation patterns corresponding to the received variation pattern command. The relationship between the received fluctuation pattern command and the judgment values of no notice effect, group notice, and step-up notice is shown. Has been.

  As the received variation pattern command, the pattern “No out and no quasi-continuous” shown in No 1, the pattern “No detach and one quasi-continuous” shown in No 2, “The out and quasi-continuous 2” shown in No 3 Pattern, No. 4 “displacement and pseudo-continuous three times” pattern, No. 5 “big hit or small hit and no pseudo continuous” pattern, No. 6 “big hit or small hit, and “Pseudo-hit once” pattern, No. 7 “Big hit or small win and pseudo-twice” pattern, No. 8 “Big or small hit and pseudo-neck three times” pattern, and No. 9 For each of the patterns of “big hit or small hit and four pseudo-reams” shown, the determination values of no notice, group notice, and step-up notice are assigned. For example, a pattern of “displaced and one pseudo-continuous” means a variation pattern in which the display result is out of date and one pseudo-continuous. Here, the “hit” includes big hits and small hits such as “normal big hit”, “probability big hit”, “first hit positive hit”, “second hit big hit”, and “small hit”.

  In the second notice type determination table, it seems that the ratio selected when the current notice, which is a group notice or a step-up notice, is a big hit or a small hit is higher than when no notice is given. A judgment value is set for. With this setting, when the previous notice is executed by the group notice or the step-up notice, the player's expectation is improved based on the fact that the percentage of big hits is higher than when the notice is not executed. be able to. In the second notice type determination table, the determination value is set so that the ratio selected when the group notice is a win is higher than that of the step-up notice. With this setting, when the group notice is executed, the player's expectation can be improved based on the fact that the ratio of winning a big hit is higher than when the step-up notice is executed.

  Further, in the second notice type determination table, the determination value is set so that the ratio selected for the big notice or the big prize is higher when the group notice is a pseudo-ream than when the group is a pseudo-ream. Is set. With such a setting, the player's sense of expectation can be improved based on the fact that the ratio of the big hit is higher when the group notice is a pseudo-ream than when the group is not a pseudo-ream.

  In addition, in the second notice type determination table, regarding the group notice, the judgment value is set such that the greater the number of pseudo-reams among the pseudo-reams, the higher the ratio selected when the big hit or the small hit is obtained. Is set. With such a setting, the player's sense of expectation can be improved on the basis of the fact that when the group notice is a pseudo-ream, the higher the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the percentage of jackpots.

  Further, in the second notice type determination table, regarding the step-up notice, it is determined that the ratio selected when a big hit or a small hit is higher when a pseudo-ream is set than when a pseudo-ream is not obtained. Value is set. With such a setting, the player's expectation can be improved based on the fact that the ratio of winning a big hit is higher when the step-up notice is a pseudo-ream than when the pseudo-ream is not.

  In addition, in the second notice type determination table, regarding the step-up notice, the determination value is set so that the ratio selected when winning is higher as the number of pseudo-reams is larger. Has been. With such a setting, the player's expectation can be improved based on the fact that the number of pseudo-reams increases as the number of pseudo-reams increases for the step-up notice.

  In addition, in the second notice type determination table, the determination value is set so that, when there is no notice, the ratio that is selected when it becomes a pseudo-continuous is higher than when it is not a pseudo-continuous. ing. With such a setting, the player's expectation can be improved on the basis of the fact that, when there is no prior notice, the rate of deviation is lower when it becomes a pseudo-ream than when it does not become a pseudo-ream.

  In addition, in the second notice type determination table, regarding no notice, the determination value is set so that the ratio selected when the number of pseudo-reams increases becomes lower as the number of pseudo-reams increases. ing. Such a setting can improve the player's expectation based on the fact that the number of pseudo-reams increases as the number of pseudo-reams increases, with no notice, based on the fact that the rate of deviation becomes lower.

  In the second notice type determination table of FIG. 55, the value of the random number SR8 is assigned by discriminating whether it is a big hit or a small hit, as described above, and the number of pseudo consecutive times (including presence / absence). An example of determining the presence / absence of a notice and the type of notice by shaking is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made, and whether or not there is a notice by assigning the value of the random number SR8 according to the type of reach (normal reach, super reach, etc.) The type may be determined. Also, the value of the random number SR8 is allocated by discriminating whether it is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of that hit (probability big hit, normal big hit, first big hit big hit, second big hit big hit, little big hit, etc.) Accordingly, the presence / absence of a notice and the type of notice may be determined.

  The group advance notice pattern determination table is used to select and determine a group advance notice pattern from the plurality of advance notice patterns in the second notice effect based on the value of the second notice pattern determination random number SR9. It is a data table. In the notice pattern determination table for group notice, the display result is determined so that the notice pattern is determined according to the judgment value determined according to whether the display result of the variable display to be executed is a big hit or not. And the relationship with the notice pattern. As the notice pattern of the group notice, for example, there are provided a plurality of kinds of different group characters that appear in the group during the group notice.

  In the notice pattern determination table for the group notice, a determination value is set so that the group character A is easily determined when the display result is off and the group character B is easily determined when the display result is successful. . As a result, when the group notice is executed with the notice pattern using the group character B, the ratio of winning a big hit is higher than when the group notice is executed with the notice pattern using the group character A. Expectation can be improved.

  It should be noted that the group character type may be determined according to a determination value determined according to whether or not it is a probable big hit. In this case, the reliability with respect to the probability variation big hit can be varied depending on the type of group character. Further, the group character type may be determined according to a determination value determined according to the hit type. In this case, depending on the type of group character, the reliability with respect to the big hit advantageous to the player can be varied.

  Next, the step-up notice notice pattern determination table used in S735 of the second notice effect setting process will be described. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram of a notice pattern determination table for step-up notice.

  The step-up advance notice pattern determination table includes a plurality of step-up advance notice patterns in the second advance notice effect based on the values of the second notice specific effect determining random number SR9 and the second notice pattern determining random number SR10. It is a data table used in order to select and decide from among the previous notice patterns.

  Referring to FIG. 56, the notice pattern determination table for the step-up notice includes three data tables shown in (a) to (c). (A) shows a normal step-up notice pattern determination table used in a state other than the latent mode. (B) shows a non-latent step-up notice pattern determination table used when the probability variation state is a low-probability state where the latent state is not latent in the latent mode. (C) shows a step-up notice pattern determination table at the time of incubation used when the probability variation state is a high-probability state in the latent mode.

  In the tables shown in (a) to (c), the relationship between the random number SR9 for determining the second notice specific effect and the step-up type to be determined (normal step-up, specific step-up) is shown and determined. The relationship between the value of the random number SR10 for determining the second notice pattern in the step-up type and the notice pattern to be determined is shown. Here, the normal step-up is a basic step-up pattern that is a standard for step-up effects. For example, the steps A to D are standard steps up such as A → B → C → D. Say. On the other hand, the specific step-up is a step-up pattern in which the step-up order is different from the normal step-up. Directing. Such a step-up type is selected and determined based on the value of SR9 extracted at a predetermined timing.

  Usually, the step-up includes a first notice pattern that steps up by one step, such as A → B, a second notice pattern that steps up by two steps, such as A → B → C, and A → And a third notice pattern that is stepped up in three steps, such as B → C → D. When the normal step-up is selected and determined, one of the first to third notice patterns is selected and determined based on the value of SR10 extracted at a predetermined timing.

  The specific step-up includes a fourth notice pattern in which the step is stepped up by one stage such as A → C, a fifth notice pattern in which the step is stepped up by two stages such as A → C → B, and the step is A → And a sixth notice pattern that is stepped up by three stages such as C → B → D. When the specific step-up is selected and determined, one of the fourth to sixth notice patterns is selected and determined based on the value of SR10 extracted at a predetermined timing.

  In the normal step-up notice pattern determination table of (a), the value of SR9 is related both when the fluctuation display result is an outlier display result and when the fluctuation display result is a big hit or small hit display result. Instead, only normal step up is selected and determined as the step up type. When any display result is obtained, one of the first to third notice patterns is selected and determined based on the value of SR10. The data table is set so that the ratio selected in the order of the first notice pattern> the second notice pattern> the third notice pattern becomes higher when the variable display result becomes the outlier display result. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a big hit or small hit display result, the data table is set so that the ratio selected in the order of third notice pattern> second notice pattern> first notice pattern is increased. . In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit or small hit display result, the third notice pattern is selected at a higher rate than the case where the variable display result is an outlier display result, and the second notice pattern is selected. The data table is set so that the ratio of selecting the first notice pattern is low and the ratio of selecting the first notice pattern is low. Accordingly, with regard to the normal step-up, the greater the number of steps to be stepped up, the higher the percentage of jackpots, so it is possible to increase the player's expectation for jackpot.

  The non-latent step-up notice pattern determination table in (b) is different from the normal step-up notice pattern determination table in (a) when the variable display result is an outlier display result based on the value of SR9. Either the normal step-up or the specific step-up is selected. The data table is set so that the normal step-up type is selected more frequently than the specific step-up type. When a specific step-up type is selected, one of the fourth to sixth notice patterns is selected and determined based on the value of SR10. Specifically, the data table is set so that the ratio selected in the order of the fourth notice pattern> the fifth notice pattern> the sixth notice pattern increases.

  The latency step-up notice pattern determination table in (c) is different from the non-latency step-up notice pattern determination table in (b) when the variation display result becomes the display result and the specified step-up notice pattern determination table is different. The selection ratio is set high, and only the specific step-up type is selected when the variable display result is a big hit or small hit display result. Therefore, when the mode is in the latent mode, the ratio of selecting the notice pattern in the specific step-up type is set higher than in the non-latent mode. Further, in the latent step-up notice pattern determination table (c), when the variable display result is the big hit or the small hit display result, the sixth notice pattern> the fifth notice pattern> the fourth notice pattern is selected in this order. The data table is set so that the percentage of In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit or small hit display result, the ratio of the sixth notice pattern being selected is higher than that when the variable display result is the display result out of order, and the fifth notice pattern is selected. The data table is set so that the ratio of selecting the fourth notice pattern is low and the ratio of selecting the fourth notice pattern is low. Therefore, as for the specific step-up, the greater the number of steps to be stepped up, the higher the percentage of jackpots, so it is possible to increase the player's expectation for jackpot.

  As a result, the notice pattern (fourth to sixth notice patterns) of the specific step-up type is in either the non-latent state (low probability state) or the latent state (high probability state) in the latent mode. However, it is set so that the rate of selection is higher in non-latency than in non-latency, so when step-up notice is given, the order of step-up is different from normal The higher the percentage of the game performed in the game, the better the player's expectation that the probability change is hidden.

  Specifically, if the specific step-up type is selected on the basis of the value of SR9 when the variable display result is an outlier display result, one of the fourth to sixth notice patterns is selected based on the value of SR10. It is determined. Specifically, as in the case of non-latent, the data table is set so that the ratio selected in the order of the fourth notice pattern> the fifth notice pattern> the sixth notice pattern increases.

  Further, only the specific step-up type is selected when the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit display result. In the specific step-up type, the data is selected so that the ratio selected in the order of the sixth notice pattern> the fifth notice pattern> the fourth notice pattern increases, contrary to the case where the variable display result becomes the outlier display result. The table is set up.

  Next, the continuation of the effect symbol variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. The effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S517 (S518). Then, a process timer (production setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S519).

  Here, the process table will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table.

  The process table includes process data as data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control execution data. The display control execution data includes, for example, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation display time (variation time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the effect symbol display mode) (Including other aspects of the screen) Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described.

  Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display.

  In the process table, for example, different process data is set for each production operation of the design pattern such as the above-described pseudo-ream and slip, and further, the above-mentioned notice (first notice effect, second notice effect is provided). Different process data is set depending on whether or not to perform a notice effect including) and the notice pattern effect operation. Therefore, for example, when it is decided to execute a notice effect in a variation display based on a certain variation pattern, process data capable of executing the notice effect based on the notice pattern determined in the variation pattern is selected according to the decision. Will be.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 controls the flashing of the light emitter in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and controls the sound output from the speaker 27. Further, the production control CPU 101 controls each of the movable member 78, the movable member 84, and the vibration motors 87a, 87b, 87c in a manner set in the movable member control data.

  The process table shown in FIG. 57 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Moreover, the process table is prepared according to each production control pattern. The process table corresponds to, for example, more specifically the above-described symbol variation control pattern table and various effect control pattern tables.

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining effects performed according to the contents of the process table. The effect control CPU 101 executes display control according to effect control execution data in the process table. That is, when the time corresponding to the timer value set as the process timer set value elapses, according to the next effect control execution data in the process table, the effect display device 9, the light emitter such as LED, the speaker 27, the movable member 78, 84 and the process of controlling the vibration motors 87a, 87b, and 87c are repeated, so that an effect in the change of the effect symbol is realized. In addition, dummy data (data not specifying control) is set in data (for example, movable member control data) corresponding to an effect part that is not controlled during the fluctuation period.

  Referring to FIG. 57, when the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of S519 in FIG. 46, the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data). 1) in accordance with the production device (production display device 9 as production component, various lamps as production component, speaker 27 as production component, movable members 78 and 84 and production motors 87a and 87b as production components. , 87c) is started (S520). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. In addition, drive signals for operating the movable members 78 and 84 and the vibration motors 87a, 87b, and 87c are output in accordance with the movable member control data.

  Next, the relationship between the variation period and the process table when realizing the variation pattern of the pseudo-continuous production will be described. For example, a case where two temporary stop periods are provided and three fluctuations (including the first fluctuation) are executed will be described as an example. Production control from the start of fluctuation to the first temporary stop is executed based on the production control execution data set in the process table of the first production, and production from the first temporary stop to the second temporary stop is performed. Control is executed based on the production control execution data set in the process table of the second production, and production control from the second temporary stop to the final stop of the symbol is set in the process table of the third production It is executed based on the effect control execution data that has been performed.

  When the fluctuating display of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the first change in S518. In the case where the pseudo continuous effect change display is performed, the effect control CPU 101 includes process data corresponding to a series of changes from the start of the change to the last stop of the re-change including the temporary stop and the re-change in the pseudo-continuous. You may make it perform a variable display using.

  Furthermore, the continuation of the effect symbol variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. The effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (S521). The variation time timer is a timer for measuring the variation time from the start of variation of the effect symbol to the stop display of the final stop symbol. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802) (S522), and the process ends.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (S802) in the effect control process.

  In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S841), and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (S842). Then, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (S843).

  Until the process timer times out (S843N), the process proceeds to S846. If it is determined in S843 that the process timer has timed out (S843Y), the process data is switched (S844). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table in the process timer (S844). In addition, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on process data such as display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data set next. The rendering device is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data (S845). As a result, when it is decided to perform the notice effects such as the first notice effect and the second notice effect as described above, the notice effect by the decided notice pattern can be executed.

  In this way, by performing time management using the process timer and sequentially switching the process data, various effect controls including variable display control as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 are performed.

  In S846, an operation effect process is performed in which an effect is generated according to the operation of the operation button 130. In the operation effect process, first, when the process data for performing the button notice effect is set as the process data, if the operation valid period in the button notice effect is in effect, the button operation of the operation button 130 is made valid, In accordance with the operation, a notice effect after a button operation for performing a notice effect is performed by selecting and determining one of a low reliability notice pattern, a medium reliability notice pattern, and a high reliability notice pattern.

  Here, the contents of the effect of the button notice displayed on the effect display device 9 will be described. When the button notice is given, an operation request display image for requesting operation of the operation button 130 is displayed on the effect display device 9, and a predetermined game such as a target game is displayed in response to the button operation. Is displayed. When the game is won, the hold storage display to be notified in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is deformed, and a low-reliability notice display “chance” is displayed as a display indicating the reliability that is a big hit; The medium reliability notice display “” and the high reliability notice display “Fever” are selected and displayed. When the display result is a big hit, as the display indicating the reliability, the ratio selected in the order of the high-reliability notice display> the medium-reliability notice display> the low-reliability notice display is increased. As the display indicating the reliability, the ratio selected in the order of the low reliability warning display> the medium reliability warning display> the high reliability warning display is increased. On the other hand, when the game is defeated, the modified display of the hold storage display and the display indicating the reliability that is a big hit are not performed. In the announcement of the button notice, it is possible to recognize that the probability of a big hit is high when winning in the game by displaying the reliability indicating such a big hit. Can be improved. The process for selecting the content of the notice display performed when the button is operated may be performed at the start of the variable display, or may be performed during the operation during the variable display. Good. In addition, as an example of a notice display performed when a button operation is performed, an example is shown in which a predetermined game display is performed. Therefore, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the operation request display image is displayed and the button operation is performed, the display of the stored storage display is immediately changed and the big hit without going through the effect display such as a predetermined game display. A display indicating the reliability may be performed.

  When the button operation is not performed during the operation valid period, a display for fading out the operation request display image is performed, and an image defeated in the game is always displayed. Thereby, in order to avoid the fixed selection decision of the image which the player lost in such a game, button operation can be promoted and a player's willingness to participate in a game can be improved. When the button operation is not performed during the operation effective period, the rate is lower than when the button operation is performed during the operation effective period. A display indicating the reliability may be selected and determined. When a button operation is performed before or after the operation valid period, a display indicating that the button operation is invalid is performed.

  Next, the description returns to FIG. In S847, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variable time timer has timed out based on the value of the variable time timer (S847). If the variation time timer has timed out (Y in S847), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) (S849). On the other hand, when the variable time timer has not timed out (N in S847), it is confirmed whether or not a confirmation command reception flag indicating that a symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S848). When the confirmation command reception flag is not set (N in S848), the effect symbol changing process is terminated. On the other hand, when the confirmed command reception flag is set (Y in S848), the process proceeds to S849. Even if the variation time timer has not timed out (N in S848), the control shifts to the variation stop when receiving the symbol determination designation command. For example, it shows a long variation time due to noise between substrates. Even when a variation pattern command is received, the variation of the effect symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol has ended).

  In addition, the part which performs the process of S841-S845 based on the fluctuation pattern containing the effect of a "pseudo ream" is equivalent to the re-change effect control process which performs a re-change effect.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (S870). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to S877. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in S876. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in S871 to S876 is executed. Without proceeding, the process proceeds to S877.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag indicating that the effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing to stop changing the effect symbol is received. It is confirmed whether or not (S871). If the confirmation command reception flag is set, control is performed to stop and display the determined stop symbol (outgoing symbol, small hit symbol or big hit symbol) (S872).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls to stop the effect symbol in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, but the variable time timer has timed out. Based on this, the effect design may be stopped and displayed.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not a small hit symbol or a big hit symbol is displayed in the process of S872 (S873). When it is determined in S872 that the small winning symbol or the big winning symbol is not displayed (that is, when the loss symbol is displayed), the effect control CPU 101 uses the value of the effect control process flag to wait for the variation pattern command reception process. The value is updated according to (S800) (S874).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S872 that the small winning symbol or the big winning symbol has been stopped, the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (S876) to indicate that the big hit starting designation command has been received. The big hit start / receipt start command reception flag indicating that a big hit start designation command reception flag (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag or big hit start 2 designation command reception flag) or a small hit / surprise start designation command has been received is set. It is confirmed whether there is (S877). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / surprise start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (S878).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit (S878A). Specifically, when the big hit start 1 designation command reception flag is set, it is determined that it is a normal big hit, and when the big hit start 2 designation command reception flag is set, it is determined that it is a probabilistic big hit. When it is determined in S878A that it is not a normal big hit or a probable big hit, the process proceeds to S879 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S878 that the game is a normal big hit or a probable big hit, it is checked whether or not the after-hit latency flag is set (S878B). The after-hit latent flag is a flag indicating that the current latent mode is the latent mode after the small hit, and, as will be described later, in the big-hit end effect processing, Set.

  When it is determined in S878B that the after-hit latency flag is not set, the process proceeds to S879 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S878B that the after-hit latent hit flag is set, a special character that is a special character that is not displayed in other states (for example, a predetermined character such as characters 91A and 91B shown in FIG. 13). Character that has a different shape from the character, a character that is different in size from the predetermined character, a character that has a different color from the predetermined character, a character that has a different luminance from the predetermined character, or a different number of individuals from the predetermined character It is decided to display a special character such as a character that can be easily identified as a character different from a predetermined character, and control data for displaying the special character is set ( S878C), reset the latent flag after small hits Not shown), the process proceeds to S879. Thereby, when the latent mode is controlled after the small hit, the special character is displayed when the big hit display screen, that is, the fanfare screen is displayed. By performing such a special effect that a special character is displayed, it is notified that a big hit has occurred despite the fact that the probability change state has not been hidden in the latent mode, so the interest of the game is improved Can be made. In other words, when the mode is controlled to the latent mode after a small hit, the probability of a big hit is low compared to when the mode is controlled to the latent mode after the first big hit, but it is also disadvantageous for such a player. Since it is a situation where a big hit has occurred, it was decided that a special production would be performed to produce a situation that would be pleasing to such a player.

  In S879, in order to perform the fanfare effect for displaying the fanfare screen described above, a process table for performing the fanfare effect corresponding to the type of hit including the big hit and the small hit is selected based on the command confirmed to be received in S877. (S879).

  The effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag when the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / coincidence start designation command reception flag is set. Also, in the process of S879, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table such as a fanfare effect corresponding to the big hit and the small hit type. Then, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (S880), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data) 1) In accordance with the production device (production device 9 as production component, various lamps as production component, speaker 27 as production component, movable members 78 and 84 as production components, and vibration motors 87a and 87b. , 87c) is executed (S881). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) (S882).

  FIG. 61 is a timing chart showing the control timing of the pre-reading notice (continuous notice) and the current notice. The contents of the timing chart of FIG. 61 have been described above to explain the control timing of the pre-reading notice and the current notice.

  Next, a specific control example of the notice effect performed by the effect control microcomputer 101 will be described. In the following, when the control state is a state in which neither the first pre-reading notice execution flag nor the second pre-reading notice execution flag is set, that is, the execution of the current notice regarding the fluctuation display of the first and second special symbols. An example of control when the state changes from the permitted state to the state in which the prefetching advance notice based on the stored data of the first special symbol is executed based on the setting of the first prefetching advance notice execution flag will be described.

  For example, when the change display of the second special symbol is performed in the state where the operation of the previous notice is permitted, when the notice type of the present notice effect by the group notice or the step-up notice is selected in S733 of FIG. The previous notice is executed with the notice pattern determined by.

  44. Based on the fact that the first start winning designation command designates a big win, a command that designates a small win, or a variation pattern type of Super Reach B in S662 of FIG. 44, a prefetch notice flag is designated in S665. Is set, the notice pattern is determined in S684 for the type of the prefetch notice effect selected in S683 of FIG. 51, the first prefetch notice execution flag is set in S686, A continuous notice starts as a notice. As described above, when the first pre-reading notice execution flag is set and the pre-reading notice is being executed based on the stored data of the first special symbol, the change of the second special symbol is displayed by S687 and S689. The pre-reading notice (continuous notice) operation is disabled. Thereby, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in such a state, the pre-reading notice (continuous notice) operation is temporarily stopped. That is, the pre-reading notice (continuous notice) operation based on the stored data of the first special symbol is continuously executed every time the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Is temporarily stopped.

  Further, when the first pre-reading notice execution flag is set, execution of the current notice is prohibited at the time of the second special symbol variation display by S731 in FIG. 54, and at the time of the first special symbol variation display. In this case, it is forbidden to run the notice. That is, when the first pre-reading notice execution flag is set, execution of the current notice is prohibited for the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Thereby, in the period when the pre-reading notice (continuous notice) based on the reserved memory data of the first special symbol is executed, in all the variable displays performed before the start condition of the variable display based on the reserved memory data is established, It is prohibited to make a notice (this notice) other than the pre-read notice (continuous notice).

  As described above, regarding the change display of the second special symbol, when the first pre-reading notice execution flag is set, that is, the pre-reading notice (continuous notice) based on the reserved storage data of the first special symbol is executed. In the period, when the variable display is executed, the current notice is not executed, and the prefetch notice (continuous notice) is not executed during the execution period.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a latent mode determination table used for determining the type of latent mode. In FIG. 62, (A) shows a first sudden hit-at-latency latency mode determination table used for selecting and determining a latent mode thereafter from any one of a plurality of latent modes at the time of occurrence of the first sudden hit. (B) shows a small hit time latent mode determination table used to select and determine one of a plurality of latent modes as a subsequent latent mode when a small hit occurs. Yes.

  In the tables shown in (A) and (B), the relationship between the value of SR11 for determining the latent mode and the latent mode to be determined is shown. In the first sudden hit big hit latency mode determination table of (A), the ratio determined to the second latent mode is higher than that of the small hit latency mode determination table of (B), and the first latent mode is decided. The data is set so that the rate at which data is transmitted is low. Thereby, when the latent mode is the first latent mode, the probability that the probability change state after the small hit is the latent mode that is not latent is higher than the second latent mode, and the latent mode becomes the second latent mode. The player can determine that the ratio of the latent mode in which the probability change state after the first collision probability hit is higher than that in the first latent mode. Thus, the player can determine whether or not the probability that the probability variation state is latent in the latent mode is high depending on the type of the latent mode.

  When the latent mode is the second latent mode, it is considered that the probability that the probability variation state is latent is high, so the player's expectation that the probability variation state is latent can be increased, When the latent mode is the first latent mode, it is considered that the probability that the probability variation state is latent is low, but it is not considered that the probability variation state is not at all, so that the probability variation state is latent. It can prevent the player's expectation from being greatly impaired.

  Further, in the data table of FIG. 11, the release pattern A is selected more frequently than the release pattern B when it becomes the first chance big hit to shift to the latent mode. In the data table of FIG. 62, the second latency pattern is selected at a higher rate than the first latency pattern when the first hit probability hit to shift to the latency mode is reached. Therefore, for example, the big winning opening is opened with the opening pattern A and the background image of the second latent mode is displayed than when the big winning opening is opened with the opening pattern A and the first latent mode background image is displayed. The time is more likely to be in a probabilistic state. As described above, the ratio of the high probability state in the latent mode differs depending on the combination of the change mode of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in the sudden hit and the common effect type such as the background image in the latent mode. Based on the relationship between the operation of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and the common type of performance in the latent mode, it is possible for the player to guess whether the proportion of the high probability state is high. Based on the combination, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  As the background image in the latent mode, the second night sky image in FIG. 14D is used as the background image in the first latent mode, and the first night sky image in FIG. 14C is used as the background image in the second latent mode. You may do it. The background image in the second latent mode has a larger number of figures such as stars shown in the background than the background image in the first latent mode. The background image in the second latent mode is a background image in the second latent mode in which the moon and planetary figures are added to the background image in the first latent mode in which only stars are shown as figures. Therefore, by adding a predetermined image (graphic image) to the same kind of image as an image reminiscent of the night sky, the background image of the second latent mode is more suitable for the first latent mode based on the size relationship of the number of images. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the probability that the probability variation state is hidden is higher than that of the background image.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the big hit end effect process (S807). In the jackpot end effect process, the effect control microcomputer 100 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect time measurement timer (S971), and measures the time for managing the ending effect performed at the end of the jackpot game state. It is confirmed whether or not the production time measurement timer set in the in-round processing has timed out (S972).

  When the performance time measurement timer times out (Y in S972), the process proceeds to S981. On the other hand, when the production time measurement timer has not timed out (N in S972), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S973).

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a process of controlling the effect devices (the effect display device 9, the speaker 27, the lamps 28a to 28c, etc.) in accordance with the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n) ( S976). For example, in order to display an image corresponding to the ending effect on the effect display device 9, the image data is read from the CGROM in accordance with the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n), and the read image data is output to the VDP 109. Output a control signal. In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control various lamps to be turned on / off. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this case, for example, the end of the big hit is notified by displaying the end of the big hit or by displaying a predetermined character on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  Then, the production control microcomputer 100 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (S977), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (S978). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (S979).

  Next, in S981 that proceeds when it is determined in S972 that the effect time measurement timer has timed out, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the first surprise hit based on whether or not the suddenness 1 end designation command reception flag is set. (S981). When it is determined in S981 that the first hit probability hit is over, a first hit probability post-latency flag indicating that the current latent mode is the latent mode after the first hit probability hit is set (S982), which will be described later. Proceed to S985. On the other hand, when it is determined in S981 that it is not the end of the first big hit big hit, it is confirmed whether it is the end of the small hit based on whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set. (S983). If it is determined in S983 that it is the end of the small hit, a small hit after latent flag is set indicating that the current latent mode is a latent mode after the small hit (S984), and the process proceeds to S985.

  In S985, a latent mode flag indicating the state of the latent mode is set (S985). Then, the type of the latent mode is selected and determined to be either the first latent mode or the second latent mode by the method for determining and selecting the latent mode as described above with reference to FIG. 62 (S986). Specifically, when the numerical data is extracted from SR11 and the first after-latency latent latency flag is set, the first latency is determined based on the extracted value of SR11 using the first sudden-actual-hit latency mode determination table. Either the mode or the second latent mode is selected and determined. On the other hand, when the after-hit latent-latency flag is set, either the first latent mode or the second latent mode is selected and determined based on the extracted value of SR11 using the small-hit latency mode determination table. .

  Next, in accordance with the determination of the type of latent mode in S986, a process is performed for making the background image in the first latent mode or the background image in the second latent mode a background image to be displayed later (S987). The process proceeds to S992, which will be described later. As a result, when the first latent mode is selected and determined, a background image of the first latent mode as shown in FIG. 14C is displayed, and when the second latent mode is selected and determined, (D ) Background image in the second latent mode is displayed.

  If it is determined in S983 that it is not the end of the small hit, whether or not it is the end of the second big hit is determined based on whether or not the second big hit end designation command reception flag is set. Confirm (S988). If it is determined in S988 that the second hit probability big end is reached, a process for making the background image in the probability variation mode a background image to be displayed later is performed (S990), and the process proceeds to S992 described later. Thereby, a background image in the probability variation mode as shown in FIG. 14B is displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in S988 that the end of the second big hit jackpot is not reached, whether or not the big hit end 2 designation command reception flag is set is checked. (S989).

  When it is determined in S989 that the probability variation big hit is over, as in the case of the second sudden big hit end, a process for making the background image in the probability variation mode a background image to be displayed later is performed (S990). It progresses to S992 mentioned later. Thereby, a background image in the probability variation mode as shown in FIG. 14B is displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S989 that it is not the end of the probable big hit, it can be determined that it is the normal big hit end in terms of the erasure method. Processing is performed (S991), and the process proceeds to S992. Thereby, the background image in the normal mode as shown in FIG. 14A is displayed.

  In S992, flags other than predetermined flags required for the subsequent processing (latency hit latency flag, first hit probability after latency flag, and latency mode flag) are reset (S992). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) (S993), and the process ends.

  In the jackpot end effect processing as described above, the normal mode background image, the probability variation mode background image, the first latent mode background image, or the second latent mode background image, depending on the type of the big hit and the small hit. Processing for displaying is performed. In this way, it is possible to distinguish and display whether the state is the normal state or the normal state using the background image, and by selecting and using the background images of the first latent mode and the second latent mode, In the latent mode, it is possible to distinguish and indicate whether the probability variation state is latent or the ratio is high.

  Note that the confirmation of whether or not the end of the first hit probability big hit in S981 is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation display, and a command (for example, a fluctuation pattern command, Alternatively, it may be performed based on whether or not a display result 4 designation command is received. In addition, the confirmation of whether or not the end of the small hit in S983 is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation display, and a command (for example, the fluctuation pattern command or the display result 6) that can specify that the small hit display result is obtained. It may be performed based on whether or not a designated command is received. In addition, the confirmation of whether or not the end of the second maximum likelihood hit in S988 is transmitted at the start of the variation display, and a command (for example, a variation pattern command, Alternatively, it may be performed based on whether or not a display result 5 designation command is received. In addition, the confirmation as to whether or not the probability variation jackpot is ended in S989 is transmitted at the start of the variation display, and a command (for example, a variation pattern command or a display result that can specify that the probability variation jackpot display result is obtained). (3 designation command) may be performed based on whether or not it has been received.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, another example for determining the type of jackpot will be described. Regarding the first special symbol, when the gaming state is a non-probable change state (low probability state) as in random 2 “2” to “9”, the game state is surely changed. Based on the numerical data that is assigned to the judgment value for the second sudden hit jackpot when in the state (high probability state), in the jackpot judgment process at the start of the fluctuation display, only one of the first and second sudden hit big hits At the end of the subsequent big hit gaming state, it is decided whether to hit the first big hit big hit or the second big hit big hit according to the big hit probability (probability variation state, non-probability variation state) at the time of fluctuation display An example of this will be described below.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special symbol jackpot type determination table according to the second embodiment. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in place of the first special symbol low probability jackpot type determination table of FIG. 7 (C) and the first special symbol high probability jackpot type determination table of FIG. 7 (D). Used.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table is a data table that is also used as a jackpot type determination table when the probability is low and when the probability is high. In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variation display result of the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the big hit type is determined based on a random number (random 2) for determining the big hit type. Out of “Crushing accuracy hit A (first hitting accuracy hit)”, “Bushing accuracy hitting B (first or second hitting accuracy hit)”, “Cushion hitting hit C (2nd hitting accuracy hitting)”, “Probability variation hitting”, “Normal hitting” It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  In the first special symbol big hit type judgment table, 0 and 1 judgment values are assigned to “Cursive Profit Hit A”, 2 to 9 judgment values are assigned to “Cursive Profit B”, and 10 Eleven decision values are assigned.

  When it is determined that “sudden hit big hit A”, it is determined later as the first hit big hit regardless of the level of the big hit probability. The reason for this is that, as shown in FIG. 8, the determination values of 0 and 1 correspond to being assigned to the first likelihood maximum in either the low probability state or the high probability state.

  When it is determined to be “success probability big hit B”, when the big hit probability is in a high probability state, it will be confirmed later as the second big hit probability big hit, while when the big hit probability is in a low probability state, it will be later decided as the first sudden hit big hit. Determine. The reason for this is that, as shown in FIG. 8, the determination values 2 to 9 are allocated to the first probability maximum hit when in the low probability state, and are allocated to the second probability maximum hit in the high probability state. This is to make it correspond.

  When it is determined that “Clash Probability C”, it is determined later as the second sudden probability big hit regardless of the level of the big hit probability. The reason is that, as shown in FIG. 8, the judgment values of 10 and 11 are allocated to the second hit probability maximum in either the low probability state or the high probability state.

  The determination of the type of such a big hit is performed as follows, for example. In the special symbol normal processing of FIG. 26, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table is selected in S345, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of random 2 in S346, and the data indicating the jackpot type is stored in S347 To remember. If it is determined in S346 that any one of the rush hits A to C is made, the type of the rush hits is stored in S347 so that it can be specified which of the rush hits A to C.

  Next, a description will be given of a method for selecting an opening pattern for the first or second most likely hit. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an open pattern determination table according to the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the open | release pattern determination table used when drawing.

  In FIG. 65, (A) shows a sudden hit big A release pattern determination table, which is a data table used when selecting an open pattern corresponding to the sudden big hit A, and (B) shows an open pattern corresponding to the sudden big hit C. Is shown a data table used when selecting an abrupt big hit C release pattern determination table, and (C) is a data table used when selecting an open pattern corresponding to the big hit B B It is shown. These tables are stored in the ROM 54.

  When it is determined that the maximum hit A will be determined, the release pattern is determined using the maximum hit A release pattern determination table shown in FIG. When it is determined that the rush accuracy hit A is determined, regardless of the level of the big hit probability, the first hit probability hit is determined. Therefore, the rush accuracy hit A release pattern determination table is opened at the time of the first hit probability hit shown in FIG. It has the same configuration as the pattern determination table.

  When it is determined that the rush probability hit C is determined, the release pattern is determined using the rush probability hit C release pattern determination table shown in FIG. When it is determined that the maximum hit C is determined, it becomes the second maximum hit regardless of whether the big hit probability is high or low. Therefore, the maximum hit C release pattern determination table is opened at the second maximum hit per hit shown in FIG. It has the same configuration as the pattern determination table.

  When it is determined that the rush probability hit B is determined, the release pattern is determined using the rush probability hit B release pattern determination table shown in FIG. The sudden hit big hit B release pattern determination table is configured so that the allocation of the determination value differs depending on whether or not the state is in a probability variation state. Specifically, when it is in the probability variation state, the determination is made by the same determination value allocation as in the first sudden probability big hit release pattern determination table shown in FIG. The determination is made by the same allocation of determination values as in the second collision probability big hit release pattern determination table.

  More specifically, when it is determined that the hit probability big hit B is the first hit probability big hit when the big hit probability is in a low probability state, the sudden hit big B release pattern determination table shows that when the non-probable change state is found. Then, the same determination as that in the first hit probability big hit release pattern determination table is performed. Further, when it is determined that the hit probability hit B is the second hit probability hit when the hit probability is in a high probability state, the second hit probability is determined when the probability hit state is in the probability change state. The same determination as in the big hit release pattern determination table is performed.

  Open pattern determination using such an open pattern determination table is performed as follows. For example, in the special symbol normal process of FIG. 28, it is checked in S61 whether or not it is determined to be one of the most likely hits A to C. In FIG. 65, any one of the opening pattern determination tables of (A) to (C) of FIG. When it is determined that the winning big hit B, the determination value used to determine the opening pattern is selected based on the current big hit probability when determining the opening pattern in S62.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing according to the second embodiment. In the case of the second embodiment, the process of FIG. 66 is used instead of the process of FIG. The process of FIG. 66 is different from the process of FIG. 32 in that S133A and S133B are provided between S133 and S134.

  If it is determined in S133 that the big hit flag is set, it is checked whether or not the probability variation flag is set (S133A). When it is determined that the probability variation flag is not set, the process proceeds to S135, and when it is determined that the probability variation flag is set, the variation probability variation state flag is set (S133B), and the process proceeds to S135. As described above, the variable probability change state flag is used when determining whether to hit the first hit probability big hit or the second hit probability big hit according to the big hit probability at the time of change display at the end of the big hit gaming state. This is used as information indicating whether or not the fluctuation display time is in the state of probability change.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the processes after S438 of the special winning opening opening process according to the second embodiment. In the case of the second embodiment, the process of FIG. 67 is used instead of the process of FIG. The processing in FIG. 67 differs from the processing in FIG. 35 in that S442A to S442F are provided between S442 and S443.

  If it is determined in S442 that the big hit type is not a probable big hit, whether or not the big hit type is one of the sudden big hits A, B, C based on the big hit type data stored in the big hit type buffer Is confirmed (S442A). In S442A, when it is determined that the big hit type is not any of the sudden big hits A, B, and C, since it is a normal big hit in terms of elimination, the process proceeds to S445.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S442A that the big hit type is any one of the sudden big hits A, B, and C, it is confirmed whether or not the above-mentioned variation probability change state flag is set (S442B).

  If it is determined in S442B that the variation probability change state flag is not set, whether or not the hit big hit A or the sudden big hit B is confirmed based on the big hit type data stored in the big hit type buffer (S442C). ). On the other hand, if it is determined in S442B that the fluctuation probability change state flag is set, it is confirmed whether or not it is the sudden hit big hit B or the sudden hit big hit C based on the big hit type data stored in the big hit type buffer. (S442D).

  When it is determined in S442C that the rush accuracy hit A or the rush accuracy hit B and in S442D it is determined that the rush accuracy hit B is not the rush accuracy hit B or the rush accuracy hit C, it is determined to be the first rush accuracy hit. (Confirm), data indicating the determined jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer (S442E), and the process proceeds to S443.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S442C that it is not the rush hit big hit A or the rush hit big hit B but the rush hit big hit C, and when it is judged in S442D that it is the rush hit big hit B or the rush hit big hit C, the second hit prone hit big hit. Is determined (confirmed), the data indicating the determined jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer (S442F), and the process proceeds to S443.

  As described above, by executing S442A to S442F, when it is determined that “abrupt hit big hit A” at the time of fluctuation display, the first big hit big hit is determined at the end of the big hit regardless of the level of the big hit probability. In addition, when it is determined that “surprise big hit B” at the time of the fluctuation display, when the big hit probability is in a low probability state at the end of the big hit, the first big hit probability is determined and the big hit probability is in a high probability state To be determined as the second big hit. Further, when it is determined that the “big hit big hit C”, the second big hit big hit is determined regardless of the level of the big hit probability at the end of the big hit. Accordingly, the jackpot type can be selected and determined based on random 2 in the same manner as the jackpot type selection mode shown in FIG. 8 of the first embodiment.

  In the case of the second embodiment, when it is determined that the probability big hit A is determined, the first big probability hit is determined regardless of whether or not the probability variation state, so the special symbol display result is shown in the first embodiment. The display result of the first hit probability big hit is displayed. Also, when the rush accuracy hit C is determined, since it is determined as the second rush accuracy hit regardless of whether or not the probability variation state, the special symbol display result is the second rush accuracy hit shown in the first embodiment. The display result of is displayed. In addition, when it is determined that the maximum hit C is determined according to whether or not the probability change state, the first hit maximum hit or the second maximum hit is determined at the end of the big hit. A display result (for example, “9”) other than the display result for the 1st accuracy hit and the display result for the 2nd accuracy hit is displayed.

  In the case of the second embodiment, when it is determined as the rush probability hits A to C, since it is determined as the first rush probability hit or the second rush probability hit, it is referred to as “1, 2, 3” as in the case of the first embodiment. The display result of the combination of the big hit symbol symbol that gives such a chance is displayed.

  On the game control microcomputer 560 side, an effect control command is transmitted to specify one of the types of “Crash Profit Hit A”, “Crash Profit B”, and “Crash Profit C”. On the side of the production control microcomputer 100, the latent mode is determined based on whether the type of the sudden hit is “surprise big hit A”, “rush big hit B”, or “outright big hit C”. It may be determined whether or not.

  Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 does not execute steps S442A to S442F in the big winning opening opening process of FIG. 67 for the processing related to the big hit big hit, but the “big hit big hit A stored in the big hit type buffer is not executed. ”,“ Accuracy big hit B ”, or“ Accuracy big hit C ”is transmitted based on the data for identifying the type of the sudden end. Then, in the game control microcomputer 560, in the big hit end process of FIG. 36, by executing the same processing as S442A to S442F, which of the big hit that becomes the high base state and the big hit that becomes the low base state It is determined whether or not to control to the short time state. In addition, in the production control microcomputer 100, an production control command (designation command for designating that the probability change state is entered, designating the probability change state is designated) that designates that the probability change state is to be established after a big hit such as a sudden success end designation command. On the basis of having received a variation pattern command), by setting a probability variation state flag indicating the probability variation state, it is recognized whether or not the effect control microcomputer 100 is in the probability variation state. When receiving a rush end designation command specifying the type of “Crush accuracy hit A”, “Bush accuracy hit B”, or “Clash accuracy hit C”, the information on the type of the rush hit specified by the command and the micro S442A to S4 described above by using the information indicating whether or not the computer 100 recognizes the probability variation state. By performing the same process as 2F, it is determined whether the rush big hit that becomes the high base state or the rush big hit that becomes the low base state, and whether or not to control to the latent mode as described above. Make a decision.

  In the second embodiment, the high base state is reached at the end of the big hit, regardless of which of the types of “the big hit big hit A”, “the big hit big hit B”, and “the big hit big hit C” is selected. An example has been shown in which it is determined whether the hit is a big hit or a low hit base. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following processing may be performed. As for “Accuracy big hit A”, since it is determined that the low-base sudden big hit will be made at the time of selection, the processing for determining the base state as described above is not performed, and the fixed low-base big hit is determined. decide. As for “Accuracy big hit C”, it will be determined that it will become a high base sudden big hit at the time of selection. Therefore, the processing for determining the base state as described above is not performed, and the high base sudden big hit is fixed. decide. Then, the process for determining the base state as described above only needs to be performed when “the sudden hit big hit B” is selected. By doing so, the control content is simplified, and the processing load of the control processing can be reduced.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, another example for determining the type of jackpot will be described. Here, with respect to the first special symbol, random numbers “2” to “9” are assigned to the determination value for the first chance big hit when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (low probability state), and the gaming state is An example will be described in which the jackpot type is determined based on numerical data that is assigned to the determination value for the probability variation jackpot instead of the determination value for the second sudden likelihood jackpot when in the probability variation state (high probability state).

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the relationship between the jackpot probability, random 2 (0 to 19), and the selected jackpot type for the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the third embodiment.

  In the third embodiment, for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot probability, random 2 (0 to 19), and the selected jackpot type is not the relationship shown in FIG. The relationship is as shown in FIG. 68 differs from FIG. 8 in that the random 2 “2” to “9” are in the gaming state, as shown in the distribution of the random 2 decision value for the first special symbol in FIG. Is a probability variation big hit determination value instead of the second sudden probability big hit determination value when is a probability variation state (high probability state).

  Such a setting may be realized by providing a plurality of jackpot type determination tables (see FIG. 7) according to the jackpot probability and determining the jackpot type as in the first embodiment. As in the second embodiment, one jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 64) may be provided regardless of the jackpot probability, and this may be realized by determining the jackpot type at the end of the jackpot.

  In this way, for the first special symbol, when the high probability state is set, the ratio of determining the big hit type as the probable big hit is higher than when the low probability variation state is set. By repeating the occurrence of 9R short-term jackpots in which a game cannot be obtained, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling tired in the game.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, an example in which a special symbol jackpot display result, a jackpot type, and an opening pattern are selected and determined at a time for each random determination value will be described.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used for game control according to the fourth embodiment. The random numbers shown in FIG. 69 are used instead of the random numbers shown in FIG. The random numbers shown in FIG. 69 are different from those shown in FIG. 6 in the following points. First, the random number 2 is used for selecting and determining a jackpot symbol (a jackpot display result). Further, the random number 7, which is a random number for determining the openness pattern, is not provided.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a jackpot symbol determination table used to determine a special symbol jackpot symbol (a jackpot display result) according to the fourth embodiment. The jackpot symbol determination table includes (A) a first special symbol jackpot symbol determination table at a low probability, (B) a first special symbol jackpot symbol determination table at a high probability, and a second special symbol jackpot symbol determination at (C). Including tables. In each of the jackpot symbol determination tables of (A) to (C), the jackpot symbol, the jackpot type, and the release pattern are associated with each of numerical data 0 to 8 that can be taken by the random number 2.

  In each of the jackpot symbol determination tables in FIGS. 70A to 70C, data is set so that the jackpot type is selected at the same rate as in the first to third embodiments. .

  When it is determined that the first special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit probability at the time of the determination is low, the first special symbol big hit symbol determination table at the low probability of (A) is selected. The jackpot symbol is determined based on the random 2 extracted value, and the jackpot type and the opening pattern are selected and determined at a time in accordance with the determination. For example, when the random 2 extracted value is “1”, the special symbol jackpot symbol is determined to be “2”, the jackpot type is determined to be the first sudden hit jackpot, and the open pattern is a pattern of 9R short-term jackpot. A is determined. In this example, since “1” to “9” are used as the big hit symbols of the special symbols, the display result of the special symbols at the time of the small hit is determined as “0”.

  In the fourth embodiment using such a jackpot symbol determination table, the random symbol 2 is extracted because the special symbol jackpot display result, the jackpot type, and the open pattern are associated with each random 2 determination value. When the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value, the jackpot type and the opening pattern are selected and determined at a time correspondingly. As described above, the special symbol jackpot display result, the jackpot type, and the release pattern are determined at a time based on the numerical data of one random counter, so the selection determination process required for making these determinations. The number can be reduced.

  The fourth embodiment described above can be applied to each of the first to third embodiments described above. For example, in the first embodiment, instead of the data tables in FIGS. 7C to 7E and the data tables in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the data in FIGS. Using the data table, the type of jackpot and the release pattern are determined. Furthermore, the jackpot symbol is also determined at a time using the data tables of (A) to (C) of FIG. For example, in S346 of FIG. 26, instead of determining only the jackpot type, the jackpot symbol, the jackpot type, and the opening pattern are determined at a time. In this way, the step of determining the big hit symbol and the step of determining the opening pattern are not necessary.

  Further, in the second embodiment, instead of the data table of FIG. 64 and the data table similar to FIG. 7E and the data table of FIGS. ) To (C) are used to determine the type of jackpot and the open pattern. Furthermore, the jackpot symbol is also determined at a time using the data tables of (A) to (C) of FIG. For example, in FIG. 70, the big hit corresponding to “0” of random 2 is the big hit A corresponding to “2” of random 2, the big hit corresponding to “1” to “3” of random 2 is the big hit corresponding to “4” of random 2 Can be selected as the big hit C, and instead of determining only the big hit type in S346 of the big hit determination process of FIG. 26, either big hit symbol or big hit type (A, B, or C for the big hit big hit is selected) Selection) and an opening pattern are determined at a time. Then, in S442A to 442F of the big hit release process of FIG. 67, either one of the sudden hit big hits A to C is determined according to whether or not the fluctuation probability change state flag is set. Determine as. In this way, the step of determining the big hit symbol and the step of determining the opening pattern are not necessary.

  In the third embodiment, among the data tables shown in FIGS. 65A to 65C, the big hit type corresponding to the random numbers “1” to “3” in the data table shown in FIG. In step S346 of FIG. 26, instead of determining only the jackpot type, the jackpot symbol, the jackpot type, and the opening pattern are determined at a time. In this way, the step of determining the big hit symbol and the step of determining the opening pattern are not necessary.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, another example of the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 20 at the time of the first hit probability hit, the second hit probability hit, and the small hit will be described.

  FIG. 71 is a timing chart showing an example of an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 20 at the time of the first hit probability hit, the second hit probability hit, and the small hit according to the fifth embodiment. The opening pattern in FIG. 71 is used instead of the opening pattern in FIG.

  71 is different from that in FIG. 10 in the case of the opening pattern B, the ninth round is not opened twice, but the opening time is controlled to be longer than the other rounds. is there. Such an open pattern B is, for example, a longer time than the time set in the big winning opening control timer in the first round to the eighth round in S406 of FIG. 33. As described above, this can be realized by setting the release pattern data. Even when such an opening pattern is adopted, it is possible to distinguish from the opening pattern A, as in the case of the opening pattern B of the first embodiment, and the same effect as that obtained in the first embodiment can be obtained. Can be obtained. Such open pattern control according to the fifth embodiment is applicable to any of the first to fourth embodiments.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, an example in which only one special symbol is provided without providing a plurality of special symbols will be described. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board 31 according to the sixth embodiment.

  The configuration in FIG. 72 is different from the configuration in FIG. 2 in the following points. One special symbol indicator 8 is provided instead of the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b which are two special symbol indicators. Also, instead of the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b, which are two decorative symbol displays, one decorative symbol display 9 is provided.

  In the case of adopting such a configuration, the special symbol change display on the special symbol display 8 is executed according to each of the winning at the first starting winning port 13 and the winning at the second starting winning port 14. What should I do? In other words, various controls for causing the first special symbol display 8a to execute the first special symbol based on the winning of the first start winning port 13 and the second special symbol display based on the winning of the second starting winning port 14. Various controls for causing the second special symbol to be executed by the device 8b may be applied to the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display unit 8, respectively. For example, taking the jackpot type allocation in the first embodiment as an example, the jackpot type allocation as shown in FIG. 8 is performed for each start winning prize, and one jackpot type allocation is performed based on the allocation of the jackpot type. It is only necessary to perform control related to the big hit based on the variation display of the special symbol.

  When only one special symbol is provided, only one start winning opening may be provided. In such a case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 7C and 7D, the ratio of allocation to the first maximum likelihood and the ratio of allocation to the second maximum probability is determined at low probability and high probability. What is necessary is just to provide a data table so that it may differ.

[Seventh Embodiment]
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, an example will be described in which the number of rounds for the normal big hit and the probability variation big round and the number of rounds for the first and second big odds are set to different numbers.

  FIG. 73 is a table showing various features of big hits and small hits according to the seventh embodiment in a table format. 73 is different from FIG. 9 as follows. Usually, the number of rounds per jackpot and probable jackpot is set to 15 rounds. In addition, the number of rounds for the first and second maximum likelihood hits is set to two. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the number of rounds for the normal jackpot and the probability variation jackpot is set different from the number of rounds for the first and second jackpots. Even when the number of rounds is set in this way, the latent mode can be realized if the number of rounds of the big hit and the small hit is the same, as shown in the first to seventh embodiments. Various controls can be executed in the same manner.

  In the above embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27 and the like) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output lamp 70, the lamp driver board 35, or the like, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to 100. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  Further, as described above, the control for establishing the variable display start condition based on the second reserved stored data in preference to the variable display start condition based on the first reserved stored data, that is, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. The control to be executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol may be applied to a gaming machine that does not perform the above-mentioned time reduction control (control to set the high base state).

  Further, as described above, when the variable display based on the second reserved storage data is performed during the execution period of the continuous notification based on the first reserved storage data, the execution of the current notification as described above is prohibited. It is possible not to prohibit the execution of.

  In addition, the control that prohibits the execution of the current notice for all the fluctuation displays that are executed before the execution of the fluctuation display based on the reserved memory count data subject to the notice during the continuous notice execution period as described above has a special symbol. The same may be applied to a gaming machine that can display only one variable.

  In addition, for the continuous notice based on the reserved memory data of the second special symbol, all fluctuations executed before the execution of the variable display based on the reserved memory number data subject to notice during the continuous notice execution period as described above. You may be made not to perform control which prohibits execution of this time notice about a display.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, a plurality of determination tables each including a data table in which determination values are assigned to a plurality of variation patterns are provided according to the number of reserved stored memories. A common determination value is assigned to a specific variation pattern such as reach B regardless of the number of reserved memories, and a different determination value is assigned to a variation pattern other than the specific variation pattern depending on the number of reserved memories. . Then, based on the fact that whether or not a specific variation pattern is obtained is determined before the variation display start condition for which the execution condition is met is established, before the start of the variation display start condition for which the determination is made Therefore, a continuous notice is given in which a specific fluctuation pattern is continuously noticed over a plurality of fluctuation displays. For super reach B as a special variation pattern type subject to prefetch determination, since a common determination value is assigned regardless of the number of reserved memories, the prefetch determination can be accurately performed regardless of the number of reserved memories. it can. In addition, for the variation pattern types that are not subject to the prefetching notice, different determination values are assigned according to the number of reserved memories, so that it is possible to select a variation pattern at a different rate depending on the number of reserved memories. Therefore, it is possible to improve the execution efficiency of the variable display, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, the first special symbol high probability big hit type determination table of FIG. 7 (D) has a ratio determined to be the second sudden probability big hit than the first special symbol low probability big hit type determination table of FIG. 7 (C). As indicated by the high level, the high base state is higher after the big hit game state of the rushing big hit when it is controlled to the high probability low base state than when it is controlled to the low probability low base state. Therefore, if controlled to a high probability state, it is possible to make it difficult for the low base state to continue, and to make the player less likely to feel fatigue, and to further improve the interest of the game it can. Further, as shown in (C) to (E) of FIG. 7, the winning at the first start winning opening 13 is controlled at a higher rate than the winning at the second starting winning opening 14 at the second sudden probability big hit. As shown in the figure, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are controlled at the high base state after the big hit gaming state of the sudden big hit, It is possible to characterize the control content after the big hit big hit game state is completed, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

  (2) As shown in (C) and (D) of FIG. 14, even when the low base state is controlled by executing a common effect in the high probability state and the low probability state in the latent mode. When the common performance is being executed, the interest of the player can be further improved by attracting the player's interest in whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state.

  (3) As in S500 of FIG. 46 and S704 and S705 of FIG. 48, when the variation display result is derived and displayed when controlled in the latent mode, the display in the variation display when not controlled in the latent mode By deriving and displaying the display results in a different derived display order from the result display order, the possibility of a high probability state is suggested. Therefore, based on visually attracting the player's interest, This can be further improved.

  (4) As shown in FIG. 56, by causing the production mode to be stepped up in a different order from the step-up production performed when the latent mode is not controlled, Since the possibility is suggested, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game based on the fact that the progress of the production attracts the player's interest.

  (5) In the data table of FIG. 11, the release pattern A is selected in a higher ratio than the release pattern B when the first hit probability hit to shift to the latent mode is reached. In the data table of FIG. 62, the second latency pattern is selected at a higher rate than the first latency pattern when the first hit probability hit to shift to the latency mode is reached. Therefore, for example, the big winning opening is opened with the opening pattern A and the background image of the second latent mode is displayed than when the big winning opening is opened with the opening pattern A and the first latent mode background image is displayed. The time is more likely to be in a probabilistic state. As described above, the ratio of the high probability state in the latent mode differs depending on the combination of the change mode of the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in the sudden hit and the common effect type such as the background image in the latent mode. Based on the relationship between the operation of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 and the common type of performance in the latent mode, it is possible for the player to guess whether the proportion of the high probability state is high. Based on the combination, the interest of the game can be further improved.

  (6) As shown in S878A to S878C of FIG. 60, when it is determined to control the big hit during the latent mode when the latent mode is controlled in the low probability state, the latent state is latent in the high probability state. Since a special effect that is not executed when the mode is controlled is executed, it is possible to improve the player's satisfaction with his game that caused such a situation.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 68, for the first special symbol, at the time of high probability (high probability low base), the first and second maximum likelihood hits are lower than at low probability (low probability low base). Since the selected ratio is set low, when it is controlled to the high accuracy low base state, it is determined that the sudden hit is at a lower rate than when it is controlled to the low accuracy low base state. Therefore, 9R short-term big hits are not likely to occur repeatedly, so that it is possible to prevent the player from having a feeling of fatigue with respect to the game and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  (8) As shown in S52 and S54 of FIG. 28, when the second reserved storage data is stored in the second reserved storage buffer, the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol is set. The second start condition for starting the variable display of 2 special symbols is established with priority. Further, as shown in S662, S665 of FIG. 44, S686 of FIG. 51, etc., based on the fact that the hold storage data for controlling to the big hit gaming state is stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer. The continuous notice effect is performed before the start condition of the variable display based on the reserved storage data is established. Then, as shown in S731 of FIG. 54, when the continuous notice effect based on the first reserved memory data is performed, the second reserved memory data is stored, and the variable display based on the first reserved memory data is started. Based on the fact that the variable display start condition based on the second reserved memory data is given priority over the condition, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second reserved memory data is displayed in the first reserved memory. When prioritized over the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data, it is prohibited to perform the previous notice effect on the variable display of the second special symbol. Thus, when the continuous notice effect based on the first reserved memory data is performed, even when the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second reserved memory data is interrupted and executed, the second special The current notice effect for the variable display of symbols is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize whether the continuous notice effect is performed for the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. . Furthermore, since the current announcement effect for the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, the presence of the continuous notice effect as the pre-reading notice executed for the variable display of the first special symbol stands out. Thus, the player can easily recognize that the continuous notice effect is being executed.

  (9) As shown in S731 and S732 of FIG. 54, when the continuous notice effect is performed, the variable display start condition based on the reserved storage data of the notice target in which numerical data corresponding to the common determination value is stored. Since it is prohibited to perform the previous notice in all the variable displays before the establishment, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the continuous notice effect is being executed.

  (10) In FIG. 51, when the first pre-reading notice execution flag is set in S687, and the variable display started in S689 is determined to be the second special symbol, the process is ended. As indicated by prohibiting the execution of the continuous notice effect during the change display of the second special symbol, the second notice based on the second reserved memory data is used when the continuous notice effect based on the first reserved memory data is performed. When the variable display of 2 special symbols is executed, in addition to the current announcement effect being prohibited, the continuous notification effect is prohibited for the variable display of the second special symbol. As a result, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in such a state, no notice effect is performed, so that the subject of the continuous notice effect is not the variation display of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the change display of the special symbol that is the target of the continuous notice effect.

  (11) In S731 in FIG. 54, when the first pre-reading notice execution flag is set, the second notice setting process is ended to perform the continuous notice for the first reserved storage data. In addition, based on the first reserved storage data, as shown in this example, the previous notice is prohibited with respect to all the variable displays executed before the variable display based on the target first reserved storage data is executed. When the continuous notice effect is performed, since the current notice effect is prohibited at least in all the variable displays before the start condition of the variable display based on the first reserved storage data is performed, the continuous notice effect is executed. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize what is being done.

  (12) As shown in S214 and S219 of FIG. 23, when the high base state (time-short state) is less frequent than the low base state, the first special symbol variation display based on the first start winning is generated. The prefetch determination is not performed for the first reserved stored data. Accordingly, only when the base is low, the prefetch determination is performed on the first reserved storage data. In such a low base state, for the first special symbol, if it is determined in S662 of FIG. 44 that the variation pattern type for continuous notice such as Super Reach B is designated by the command, the prefetching notice in S665 of FIG. Since the flag is set and the first pre-reading notice execution flag is set in S686 in FIG. 51, the continuous notice is performed for the first special symbol at such a low base. When the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in the state where the first pre-reading notice execution flag is set by S731 in FIG. 54, the second notice setting process is ended. When the continuous notice for the first stored data is performed, this notice is prohibited for the variable display of the second special symbol. The frequency with which the first special symbol based on the first start winning is displayed is based on the fact that the second special symbol based on the second starting winning is given priority. Therefore, it is prohibited to perform the current notice effect on the variable display of the second special symbol when the frequency of the variable display based on the first reserved storage data is high. It is possible to make the presence of the continuous notice effect executed for the variable display more clearly. Further, in the high base state where the frequency of execution of the variable display based on the first reserved storage data is low, by not performing the process for determining the advance notice pattern such as S733 to S735 in FIG. It is possible to reduce the number of executions of processing steps that need to be executed each time the variable display is performed, thereby reducing the control burden on the production control microcomputer 100 in the high base state.

  (13) As shown in S690, S696, and S695 of FIG. 51, when the display display of the super reach A is started, it is prohibited by forcibly ending the pre-reading notice effect being executed. By performing such a control, it is possible to stop the pre-reading notice effect as necessary with respect to the effect of the variable display, so that the player's sense of expectation for the big hit gaming state is more than necessary with respect to the pre-reading notice effect. Can be prevented from falling into.

  (14) Thus, the variable display of the second special symbol display 8b based on the data of the second reserved memory is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a based on the data of the first reserved memory. By doing so, the following effects can be obtained. During a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, the time-shortening control is performed, so that it becomes easy for the variable winning ball device 15 to win the game ball at the second start winning port 14. Therefore, during the predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, the data in the second reserved memory is more likely to be generated than at other times. When the reserved storage data is stored in both the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer, the second reserved storage is more effective than the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a based on the first reserved storage data. Since the variation display of the second special symbol display 8b based on the data is preferentially executed, it is possible to efficiently process the stored storage data that is likely to occur in the short time state after the end of the big hit gaming state. The execution efficiency of the variable display of the second special symbol display 8b in the short time state after the end of the big hit gaming state can be improved. As shown in FIG. 7, jackpot types with different numbers of rounds are determined at different ratios between the fluctuation display executed by the first special symbol display 8a and the fluctuation display executed by the second special symbol display 8b. Therefore, whether the big hit gaming state is entered during high base (when the short-time state control is performed) or the big hit gaming state is entered during low base (when the short-time state control is not performed). The interest of the game can be improved based on the ease of winning of the game ball in the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 in the big hit gaming state, that is, the value of the payout rate is different. Specifically, in the high base state, the frequency at which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed after starting the winning at the second starting winning port 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15 is increased. As a result, the probability of 9R long-term big hits can be increased compared to the low base state, and if the big base game state in the high base state continues, The interest rate for the game can be improved by improving the baseball ratio and increasing the player's expectation for the big hit in the high base state.

  (15) Whether to execute the pre-reading notice and the current notice is determined by separate processing, but is executed at different timings. It is possible to prevent the contents of the game from being confused and to prevent the player from being confused.

  (16) Also, as shown in S215, S219, etc. in FIG. 23, in the big hit gaming state, in order not to pre-read the reserved storage data, the winning effect processing for performing the pre-read determination is not executed, A first start winning designation command that does not specify a prefetch determination result is transmitted. As described above, when the game is in the big hit gaming state, the pre-reading determination is not performed for the first start winning. During the big hit gaming state, the pre-reading determination with respect to the first reserved storage buffer is prohibited, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively stimulated. Furthermore, since the prohibition of such a pre-reading determination is performed when the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the player's gambling will not be excessively stimulated without deteriorating the interest of the game. can do.

  (17) Also, as shown in S214, S219, etc. in FIG. 23, in the time-saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state, in order to avoid pre-reading the stored stored data, a winning effect process is performed. A first start winning designation command that does not execute and does not specify a prefetch determination result is transmitted. As described above, when the time is short after the big hit gaming state, the pre-reading determination is not performed for the first start winning. When pre-determination is determined for the first reserved storage buffer when the time is controlled in a short time during the predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, the player's gambling feeling should not be excessively stimulated. Can do. Furthermore, since the prohibition of such a prefetch determination is performed when the time is controlled in a short time state, the player's excitement is not excessively stimulated without deteriorating the interest of the game. be able to.

  (18) Further, as shown in S214, S215, S219, etc. in FIG. 23, in order to prevent pre-reading the stored memory data during the big hit gaming state and in the time saving state after the big hit gaming state, The first start winning designation command which does not specify the prefetch determination result is transmitted without executing the winning effect process for performing the prefetch determination. As described above, the pre-reading determination is not performed for the first start winning prize during the big hit gaming state and when the time is short after the big hit gaming state ends. The pre-reading determination for the first reserved hold storage buffer is prohibited during the big hit gaming state and during the predetermined time period after the big hit gaming state ends, so the player's gambling feeling is excessive. You can avoid irritation. Further, since the prohibition of such pre-reading determination is performed when the game is controlled to the big hit game state and when the game is controlled to the short-time state, the game is not reduced without causing a decrease in the interest of the game. It is possible to avoid excessively stimulating the person's euphoria.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In each of the above embodiments, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. The circuit may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  (2) In each of the embodiments described above, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit another board (for example, (Sound / lamp board having the functions of the audio output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 3 or the circuit mounted on the audio output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35) An effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command, and the effect display device 9 and the decorative design indicators 9a and 9b are changed. You may make it transmit to the microcomputer 100 for presentation control to control. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  (3) Based on the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 is an effect display device 9 as an effect part, and is used as a special symbol display specified by the symbol variation designation command. Since it is configured to execute the corresponding notice effect, even if two special symbol indicators (special symbol indicator 8a and special symbol indicator 8b) are provided, the player is informed of the progress of the game ( It is possible to make it easy to grasp which variation display means is producing an effect corresponding to the variation display.

  (4) Based on the variation pattern command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 is an effect display device 9 as an effect component, and is used as a special symbol display specified by the symbol variation designation command. Even if two special symbol displays (the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b) are provided, the game can be played even if the variation display effect according to the corresponding variation mode is executed. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game (such as which special symbol display is used to produce the display corresponding to the variation display) and to enrich the variations of the game.

  (5) In each of the above-described embodiments, a display composed of two LEDs is used as the second symbol display as the special symbol indicator. However, the ornament symbol display has such a configuration. Not limited. For example, you may comprise one or more 7 segment LED. In addition, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is not provided with a decorative symbol display.

  (6) The embodiment described above is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing a gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  (7) The above-described embodiment can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game embodiment is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (8) In embodiment mentioned above, the example which comprises the 1st special symbol indicator 8a and the 2nd special symbol indicator 8b by the same kind of indicator (7 segment LED) was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured by different types of displays. Specifically, one of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be a seven-segment display and the other may be a dot matrix display. One of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is composed of a 7-segment display, and the other is composed of an LED display such as the decorative symbol display 9a, 9b. May be.

  (9) In the embodiment described above, the display result of the variable display on the normal symbol display 10 that is variably displayed when it is detected that the game ball has passed the gate 32 is the predetermined display result (winning symbol). In this example, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in the open state. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the variable symbol ball apparatus 15 may be controlled to be in the open state when it is detected that the game ball has passed the gate 32 without providing the normal symbol display 10. .

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a specific variation pattern of the pseudo-series (a variation pattern that specifies information related to variation such as the number of variations), and the variation is performed using the effect control command. Instructing the pattern, the production control microcomputer 100 recognizes a specific variation pattern of the pseudo-series (a variation pattern that specifies information related to variations such as the number of variations) based on the rendering control command, and varies the pseudo-series. An example of executing variation display with patterns was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production control microcomputer 100 may determine a specific variation pattern of the pseudo-continuous (an effect pattern including a re-change notification effect). For example, the game control microcomputer 560 side transmits a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern, and the effect control microcomputer 100 side stores the pseudo-series stored corresponding to the received variation pattern command. Based on the presence / absence and information on the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-series, a specific variation pattern of the pseudo-series may be determined.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the game control microcomputer 560 determines the number of pseudo-series fluctuations is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production control microcomputer 100 determines the number of pseudo-series fluctuations. You may make it do. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a variation pattern command that can specify whether or not to execute a pseudo-ream, and the effect control microcomputer 100 is determined to execute a pseudo-ream. Is received, the number of fluctuations of the pseudo-ream is determined.

  (12) In the embodiment described above, three types of display devices, a special symbol display device, a decorative symbol display device, and a production symbol display device, are provided as display devices for variably displaying symbols as identification information. An example was given. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one display device for displaying an image, such as the effect display device 9 for displaying the effect symbol described above, is provided as a display device for variably displaying the symbol as identification information. The special symbol, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol as described above may be unified into one type of symbol, and the variation display of the symbol and the display of various effect images may be performed.

  (13) In 1st Embodiment mentioned above, the example which makes the change display result of production | presentation symbol the same display result was shown by the 1st hit probability hit and the 2nd hit probability hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the bases are different between the first hit probability hit and the second hit probability hit. Therefore, different display results may be displayed. Moreover, in 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, the example which makes the change display result of a production | presentation symbol the same display result was shown by the 1st hit probability hit and the 2nd hit probability hit. However, at the time of displaying the display result, the case where the first hit probability hit is determined (Attack probability hit A) and the case where the first hit accuracy hit or the second hit accuracy hit is not fixed (Brush accuracy hit B) And the case where the second likelihood big hit is fixed (the likelihood big hit C), different display results may be displayed in each case. In addition, for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the first hit probability hit is determined (the hit probability hit A), or when either the first hit probability hit or the second hit probability hit is not determined ( Different display results may be displayed for each of the cases where the rushing hit B) and the second rushing hit are determined (the rushing hit C).

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been shown in which either the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B can be selected for both the first hit probability hit and the second hit probability hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the opening pattern A may be selected for the second likelihood hit, and either the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B may be selected for the first likelihood hit. Further, it may be determined that the first hit probability hit is an open pattern A and the second hit probability hit is an open pattern B. In this way, it is possible to collectively determine the opening pattern when determining the type of jackpot.

  (15) In the embodiment described above, when it is determined to control the jackpot during the latent mode when the latent mode is controlled in the low probability state as shown in S878A to S878C of FIG. In the example, a special effect that is not executed when the latent mode is controlled in the high probability state is executed after the display result of the variable display is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and such a special effect may be executed as, for example, a special notice effect when the variable display is executed.

  (16) In FIG. 61 of the above-described embodiment, the various background images to be displayed are displayed when the timing is reached when there is an opportunity to change the state such as the end of the short-time state. May be terminated, or the display of the background image may not be terminated.

  (17) In the embodiment described above, the latent mode may be executed not only when the 9R short-term big hit is controlled but also when the 9R long-term big hit is controlled. For example, it is possible to always shift to the latent mode at the big hit, and to shift to the latent mode at a predetermined ratio of less than 100% at the probability variation big hit. By doing so, the interest of the game can be further improved. Specifically, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is determined, a selection means such as a random counter is used to make a selection determination (random determination) as to whether or not to set the 9R long-term jackpot latent mode. When it is decided to switch to the mode, the 9R long-term big-hit latent mode is selected as the big-hit display result, as one of the combination of even-numbered symbols (non-probability display result) as the normal big-hit as the display result of the production symbol. If it is decided not to enter the latent mode, select one of the odd symbol combinations, which is a combination of odd variation jackpots, and enter the rendering mode indicating that the probable jackpot has been confirmed. What is necessary is just to control to transfer. In this way, a 9R long-term big hit latent mode can be realized with some big hits in the probability big hit and the normal big hit. Such control related to the latent mode is preferably performed by the production control microcomputer 100.

  (18) A low-accuracy base short-term hit, which is a 9R short-term big hit that is controlled to a low-accuracy high-base state after the big hit, may be provided as the type of the sudden hit big hit. When such a low-accuracy base short-term big hit is provided, the production in the latent mode is performed after the low-accuracy base short-term big hit and after the second sudden hit (which is controlled to the low-accuracy base state after the big hit). You may make it perform. That is, these jackpots are in the same high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so after the jackpot gaming state ends, the same effect can be performed, such as displaying a latent mode image as shown in FIG. For example, it is possible to produce an effect that provides the same effect as the effect in the latent mode as described above, which is executed after the first big hit and after the small hit.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the first or second start prize designation command when the number of reserved prizes increases due to a new start prize, and holds the pending memory by executing the variable display. An example is shown in which a pending memory count subtraction command is transmitted when the number decreases. In the production control microcomputer 100, the total pending storage number is increased in response to the reception of the first or second start winning designation command, and the total pending storage number is decreased in response to the transmission of the reserved memory number subtraction designation command. . Not limited to this, as a command for specifying the number of reserved memories, a command for specifying the total number of reserved memories at a timing when the number of reserved memories increases and a timing when the number of reserved memories decreases can be The number of reserved memories may be notified from the control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100. In addition, the command for specifying the number of reserved memories is divided into the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, and the total reserved memory at the timing when the number of reserved memories increases and the timing when the number of reserved memories decreases. By transmitting a command for specifying the number, the game control microcomputer 560 may inform the production control microcomputer 100 of the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  (20) When determining the variation pattern type in the winning effect process of FIG. 25, a determination program in which threshold data for determining the variation pattern type is set is used without using the table for determining the variation pattern type. Then, the variation pattern type may be determined. As a command indicating the determination result, a different command may be transmitted for each threshold. For example, if the determination is made by assigning the determination values as shown in FIG. 15, a command indicating that the first determination result is 0 to 49,..., 105 to 109, and the fifth determination result. A different command is transmitted for each threshold value, such as a command indicating that it has become.

  (21) In the prize-winning effect process in FIG. 25, an example is shown in which a command indicating the determined variation pattern type is transmitted even when it is determined that a big hit or a small win is made in the big hit determination process. However, when the production control microcomputer 100 performs processing related to the pre-reading notice, the information on the variation pattern type is required at the time of losing, so when the big hit or the small hit is decided, the decision is made. Instead of transmitting the command specifying the variation pattern type, it is sufficient to transmit a command that can specify the type of small hit and big hit. In that case, in the first notice type determination table of FIG. 52, the data is set so that the ratio of the notice selection is different for each type of small hit and big hit, regardless of the variation pattern type, in the case of small hit and big hit. It only has to be done.

  (22) In the big hit determination process of FIG. 26, when it is executed at the time of starting winning for performing the pre-reading notice, the big hit flag in S344 or the small hit flag in S349 is not set on the register. It is also possible to confirm that a big hit or a small hit is made based on the calculation process in and to execute a process such as determining the big hit type. By doing so, there is no need to reset the big hit flag or the small hit flag in the winning effect processing.

  (23) In the variation pattern setting process of FIG. 29, when the variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected, an example is shown in which the determination table is selected according to the total number of pending storages. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination table may be selected according to the number of reserved memories for each symbol, the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol.

  (24) In the above-described embodiment, regardless of whether the base is a low base or a high base, when hitting a big hit, the first hit big hit that becomes a low base and the second hit big hit that becomes a high base The example controlled by either was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the high base state, when the big hit is a big hit, the control may be made only for the second big hit big hit that becomes the high base.

  (25) It should be noted that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  13 first start winning opening, 14 second starting winning opening, 8a first special symbol display, 8b second special symbol display, 1 pachinko gaming machine, 15 variable winning ball device, 560 microcomputer for game control, 100 production Microcomputer for control, 32 gate, 20 special variable winning ball device, 503 random number circuit, 55 RAM, 9 effect display device, 9L, 9C, 9R symbol display area.

Claims (1)

After the first execution condition of the variable display based on the passage of the game medium through the first start area is satisfied, the variable display of the first identification information is performed based on the establishment of the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display. A first variation display unit that executes and displays a display result, and a second start that allows the start of variation display after the second execution condition for variation display based on the passage of the game medium through the second start area is satisfied. And a second variation display unit that executes variation display of the second identification information and derives and displays the display result based on the establishment of the condition, and the display result derived and displayed on the first variation display unit or the second variation display unit When a predetermined specific display result is obtained, the gaming state is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, and a low probability as a normal state based on a predetermined special state occurrence condition being satisfied. Table of fluctuation display rather than state Result is a game machine for controlling the high-probability state probability of the particular display result is improved,
A variable winning device capable of changing between a first state in which game media easily pass through the second starting area and a second state in which game media are less likely to pass through or not pass through than the first state;
The game state can be changed between a first state in which a game medium can be won and a second state in which the game medium is harder to win or not win than the first state, and when the game state is controlled to the specific game state, the first state is reached. Special variable prize device controlled,
A state in which the variable winning device is controlled to a high frequency state where the frequency of becoming the first state is high, or a low frequency state where the frequency of the variable winning device becoming the first state is lower than the high frequency state. Control means;
When the first execution condition is established, the first numerical data updated by the first numerical data updating means is extracted as information for determining whether or not to control to the specific gaming state, and the variable display First numerical data extracting means for extracting second numerical data updated by the second numerical data updating means as information for determining the fluctuation pattern of
Numerical information including the first numerical data and the second numerical data extracted by the first numerical data extraction means for the variable display in which the first execution condition is satisfied but the first start condition is not satisfied First hold storage means capable of storing the information as hold storage information within a predetermined upper limit range;
Extracting the first numerical data updated by the first numerical data updating means as information for determining whether or not to control to the specific gaming state when the second execution condition is satisfied; Second numerical data extraction means for extracting the second numerical data updated by the second numerical data update means as information for determining the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display;
Numerical information including the first numerical data and the second numerical data extracted by the second numerical data extraction means for the variable display in which the second execution condition is satisfied but the second start condition is not satisfied Second hold storage means capable of storing the information as hold storage information within a predetermined upper limit range;
A plurality of determinations comprising a plurality of data tables provided according to the number of storages of the storage information stored in each of the first storage storage unit and the second storage storage unit, wherein determination values are assigned to a plurality of variation patterns. A value table;
Based on the establishment of the first start condition, the first numerical value extracted by the first numerical data extraction means when the first execution condition of the variable display in which the first start condition is satisfied is established. It is determined whether to control to the specific gaming state using data, whether to control to the high probability state, and based on the second start condition being met, the second start It is determined whether or not to control to the specific gaming state using the first numerical data extracted by the second numerical data extraction means when the second execution condition of the variable display in which the condition is satisfied is satisfied. And a pre-determining means for determining whether to control to the high probability state;
The second numerical value extracted by the first numerical data extraction means when the first execution condition of the variable display subject to determination by the prior determination means is satisfied in response to the determination by the prior determination means. The variation display of the variation display of the first identification information is selected using data and the determination value table, and the variation display that is the target of the determination by the prior determination unit according to the determination by the prior determination unit A variation pattern of the variation display of the second identification information using the second numerical data extracted by the second numerical data extraction means when the second execution condition is satisfied and the determination value table. A variation pattern selection means to select;
Based on the second numerical data extracted by the first numerical data extraction means and the determination value when the first execution condition is satisfied, a specific fluctuation pattern among a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and An execution condition satisfaction determination means for determining whether or not the first execution condition is satisfied before the first start condition of the variation display of the first identification information is satisfied;
Based on the determination by the determination means when the execution condition is satisfied, the change display subject to the determination is notified before the first start condition is satisfied over a plurality of variable displays before the first change condition is satisfied. A pre-reading notice execution means to perform,
The specific gaming state is
A first specific gaming state that is terminated by changing the special variable prize-winning device to the first state for a predetermined period, and is controlled to the high probability state after the specific gaming state is finished;
The special variable winning device is terminated by changing to the first state for a period shorter than the predetermined period, and includes a second specific gaming state controlled to the high probability state after completion of the specific gaming state,
The state control means is configured such that the low-frequency state and the low probability when the display result becomes the specific display result and is controlled to the second specific gaming state in the low-frequency state and the high-probability state. In a state, the display result becomes the specific display result and is controlled to the high-frequency state and the high-probability state after the second specific gaming state at a higher rate than when the second specific gaming state is controlled. ,
In the plurality of determination value tables, as the determination value, a common determination value is assigned to a specific variation pattern among the plurality of variation patterns regardless of the number of the stored storage information. Different variation values other than the pattern are assigned different judgment values depending on the number of stored stored information,
The variation display of the first identification information and the variation display of the second identification information are controlled to the second specific gaming state and at the end of the second specific gaming state, the high-frequency state and the high-probability state. A gaming machine, characterized in that the display results to be controlled are derived and displayed at different rates.

Images